New Culver's Restaurant - Campbell Construction€¦ · Alternate No. 1: Omit prefinished, solid core, flush wood doors with transparent finished wood veneer face from Base Bid. Provide

PROJECT MANUAL PROJECT NO. OEMA-2014-107

New Culver's Restaurant

Janesville, Wisconsin County of Rock

PPPRRROOOJJJEEECCCTTT MMMAAANNNUUUAAALLL PROJECT NO. OEMA – 2014-107

NEW CULVER’S RESTAURANT 645 Midland Road

Janesville, Wisconsin 53546

A SINGLE CONTRACT FOR: GENERAL WORK

PLUMBING WORK FIRE PROTECTION WORK

HVAC WORK ELECTRICAL WORK

OLLMANN ERNEST MARTIN ARCHITECTS

509 SOUTH STATE STREET BELVIDERE, ILLINOIS 61008

March 9, 2015

SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

000101 TITLE PAGE ............................................................................................................. 000101 – 1 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS........................................................................................ 000110 – 1-2 000111 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE ................................ 000111 - 1

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 012200 UNIT PRICES ........................................................................................................... 012200 – 1 012300 ALTERNATES.......................................................................................................... 012300 – 1 013300 SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................................... 013300 – 1-2 015001 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 015001 – 1-5

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS 023213 SOILS INVESTIGATIONS ...................................................................................... 023213 – 1

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ............................................................................. 033000 – 1-9

DIVISION 4 MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY .................................................................................................. 042000 – 1-5 047300 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER ................................................................. 047300 – 1-6

DIVISION 5 METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS ..................................................................................... 055000 – 1-5

DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY ......................................................................................... 061000 – 1-6 061753 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES ........................................................................ 061753 – 1-2 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY ........................................................................................... 062000 – 1-5

DIVISION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 BUILDING INSULATION .................................................................................... 072100 – 1-3 072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM ................................................. 072400 – 1-7 075419 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 075419 – 1-6 076200 SHEET METAL WORK ........................................................................................ 076200 – 1-4 079200 JOINT SEALANTS ................................................................................................ 079200 – 1-4

DIVISION 8 OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL WORK ................................................................................... 081113 – 1-4 081416 WOOD DOORS ..................................................................................................... 081416 – 1-4 081513 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS .............................................................. 081513 – 1-4 084113 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS ............................................................ 084113 – 1-5 087100 FINISH HARDWARE ........................................................................................... 087100 – 1-4 088000 GLAZING .............................................................................................................. 088000 – 1-6

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-1

DIVISION 9 FINISHES 092116 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS .............................................................................. 092116 – 1-5 093013 CERAMIC & QUARRY TILE ............................................................................... 093013 – 1-3 095113 LAY-IN CEILINGS ............................................................................................... 095113 – 1-3 096518 HYBRID CARPET ................................................................................................. 096518 – 1-4 099000 PAINTING ............................................................................................................ 099000 – 1-5

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 102113.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS........................................................... 102113.19 – 1-5 104400 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES ................................................................ 104400 – 1-2

DIVISIONS 11 - 21 NOT USED

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING ........................................................................................................... 220000 – 1-5 224200 FIXTURES ............................................................................................................ 224200 – 1-3

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .................................. 230000 – 1-6 233113 DUCTWORK ......................................................................................................... 233113 – 1-3

DIVISIONS 24 & 25 NOT USED

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS ............................................................ 260000 – 1-4 260010 GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE ........................................... 260010 – 1-3 265000 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION .............................................. 265000 – 1-5


DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 312000 EARTHWORK ....................................................................................................... 312000 – 1-8


END 000110.

OEMA-2014-107 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-2 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

SECTION 000111 – OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE

1.01. DEFINITIONS

A. INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE: Instruments of service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

1.02. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE

A. The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. Entities other than the Architect shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s reserved rights.

B. Entities other than the Architect are authorized to reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. Entities other than the Architect may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Architect.

1.03. TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM

A. Instruments of Service shall not be transmitted in digital form without the specific written consent of the Architect.

END OF DOCUMENT 000111.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 000111-1

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 012200 – UNIT PRICES

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

1.02. DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.03. PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

2.PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

3.EXECUTION

3.01. SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price 1: Removal of unsatisfactory soil and replacement with satisfactory soil material.

1. Description: Unsatisfactory soil excavation and legal disposal off site and replacement with satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off site, as required, according to Section 312000 "Earthwork."

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of soil excavated, based on survey of volume removed.

B. Unit Price No. 2: Rock excavation and replacement with satisfactory soil material.

1. Description: Classified rock excavation and disposal off site and replacement with satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off site, as required, according to Section 312000 "Earthwork."

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of rock excavated, based on survey of volume removed.

END 012200.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin UNIT PRICES 012200-1


SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

1. GENERAL 1.01. SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.02. DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.03. PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate the costs of related coordination, revision or adjustment to related Work affected by alternate.

2. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

2. PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

3. EXECUTION 3.01. SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Omit prefinished, solid core, flush wood doors with transparent finished wood veneer face from Base Bid. Provide in their place, prefinished, solid core, flush wood doors with plastic laminate faces.

B. Alternate No. 2: Omit steel mesh reinforcement for slabs-on-grade from Base Bid. Provide in its place, fiber reinforcement for slabs-on-grade.

END 012300.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin ALTERNATES 012300-1


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS

1. GENERAL A. Contractor shall:

1. Review each submittal.

a. Verify field dimensions.

b. Verify compliance with Contract requirements.

2. Stamp submittals, certifying his review.

3. Transmit reviewed submittals to Architect by way of the agreed transmittal form.

B. Color Selection Schedule: Within 30 days of notice to commence work, Contractor shall submit a list of all materials requiring Architect’s color selection. The list shall include manufacturer’s name and model number of each and every item.

C. Time for Review: Contractor should allow 2 weeks for Architect’s review of most submissions. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal that requires coordination with other submittals, until all related submittals are submitted. No extension of time to perform the Contract will be authorized because of Contractor’s failure to make submissions to Architect in time for Architect to execute a thorough review.

2. SUBMITTALS SPECIFIED IN CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner all of the items required to be submitted under the

Conditions of Contract, as supplemented, including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Certificates of Insurance.

2. Performance Bond and Payment Bond.

3. Schedule of Values.

4. Name of safety officer (if not superintendent).

5. Partial & Final Waivers.

3. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Shop Drawings of all fabricated work shall be prepared by the fabricator and submitted to the

General Contractor for review. All Shop Drawings shall bear verification of Subcontractor’s review and approval prior to submittal. No work shall be fabricated by order of the Subcontractor, save at his own risk, until review of Shop Drawings has been completed by the General Contractor.

B. Shop Drawings submitted to the General Contractor for review shall include 1 reproducible transparency and 3 opaque prints, unless specified otherwise. The reviewed reproducible transparency will be returned to the submitter, who shall be responsible for its reproduction and for distribution to the parties concerned.

C. Product Data, such as catalog cuts and brochures, submitted to the General Contractor for review shall include a minimum of 4 copies of each item to be reviewed, unless otherwise specified.

D. MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) submitted with Product Data will be considered as product information only and will not be accepted as being part of the MSDS submittal requirements for O&M manuals.

E. Corrections or changes indicated on Shop Drawings and Product Data shall not be considered as an order for extra work.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin SUBMITTALS 013300-1

F. No Shop Drawing or Product Data will be considered reviewed unless it bears stamp and signature of the General Contractor.

4. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. At termination of work, the General Contractor shall submit to the Owner 2 copies of an operation

and maintenance manual presenting full details of care, maintenance and operation of mechanical equipment and other operable equipment of every nature. Manuals shall include such things as:

1. Manufacturer’s instructions for care.

2. Spare parts lists and sources of supply.

3. Wiring diagrams.

4. Control diagrams, etc.

B. For temperature control equipment, manuals shall contain narrative of the control cycle for the control equipment as well as descriptive diagrams.

C. Include a section pertaining to door hardware, which shall contain the final approved Hardware Schedule, Key Schedule and installation instruction sheets.

D. The O&M manuals shall be compiled into 3–ring binders for submission to the Owner.

5. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS A. Should any material be installed in the Work for which a Material Safety and Data Sheet (MSDS) is

required to be retained by the Owner under State regulations, the installing subcontractor shall submit the applicable MSDS forms to the General Contractor for submission to the Owner upon completion of the Project.

B. 2 MSDS forms shall be submitted for each item. Only official OSHA MSDS forms shall be used; copies will not be accepted.

C. The General Contractor shall compile the forms and bind them into the O&M manual submitted to the Owner.

6. GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. The Contractor shall compile 2 copies of all guarantees and warranties and bind them into the O&M

Manuals.

7. RECORD DRAWINGS A. At completion of work and prior to final payment, the General Contractor shall provide the Owner

with complete, accurate, clean and legible record drawings made from a complete set of marked up Contract Drawings kept at the site, showing changes made to the Work during the course of the Contract.

B. The General Contractor shall verify completeness of record drawings before submission.

END 013300.

OEMA-2014-107 013300-2 SUBMITTALS Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin


SECTION 015001 - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

1. JOB CONDITIONS & OPERATIONS A. The Contractor and each subcontractor and material supplier shall inform himself of the conditions

relating to execution of his work. Neglect of this requirement will not be accepted as cause for additional payment and/or additional time for completion.

B. Each manufactured article, material and item of equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by its manufacturer unless specified to the contrary.

C. All on-site welding shall conform to the requirements and techniques of Factory Mutual Engineering Division.

D. General Contractor shall enforce all rules that Owner may establish for conduct of workers on premises including the use of radios and like devices.

E. No permanent structures shall be loaded with materials or equipment or otherwise loaded so as to invite damage.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for providing dust control for exterior excavating and grading work, in accordance with appropriate codes and ordinances, for the duration of the project construction work.

2. GRADES, LINES & LEVELS A. General Contractor shall take measurements at site as required for the work and to locate existing

utilities. General Contractor shall contact the city, the county, the Owner and all utility companies to carefully review all records of exposed, concealed and buried points of connections, as to location, size, type, depth, operating characteristics, etc.

B. General Contractor shall lay out the construction and establish all lines and levels for the work as required by the Drawings and Specifications. General Contractor shall maintain proper base lines, levels, and benchmarks outside and inside the building, where necessary, for the use of all trades.

C. General Contractor shall provide services of a registered surveyor to establish permanent benchmarks, to check lines and elevations and to check locations of anchor bolts and similar devices before steel erection proceeds.

D. Each trade shall lay out and establish all other lines and levels necessary for its work.

3. PROJECT MEETINGS A. General Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and coordinating project meetings to be held at

times designated by Owner’s representative. Subcontractors, when requested, must attend these meetings.

B. If the principal of a firm does not attend a project meeting, the person selected to represent the firm must be authorized to bind the company to a decision at the meeting.

4. USE OF SITE A. Space limitations: No areas outside construction limits may be used for any purpose by contractors

or subcontractors.

B. Contractors shall confine equipment, storage of materials, parking and operations of workmen to the limits indicated by Owner. Site storage space shall be confined to area of site.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 015001-1

C. No signs will be permitted on the site, except for signs identifying architect’s, engineers’, contractors’ and Owner’s names, signs related to the processes necessary to accomplish the Work, signs for protection of persons and property, signs required by law and signs otherwise approved by Owner.

5. MATERIALS DELIVERY & STORAGE A. Store, place and handle the material and equipment delivered to job site so as to preclude inclusion of

foreign substances or causing of discoloration therein. Pile neatly and compactly; barricade to protect public from injury. Protect materials as required to prevent damage from weather or the ground. Any temporary storage facilities required on-site shall be stormproof and raised above the ground.

B. Owner assumes no responsibility for materials stored in building or on site. General Contractor assumes full responsibility for damage due to storage of materials.

6. CLEANING A. General Cleaning: The General Contractor shall remove loose rubbish and debris from the building

site promptly as it accumulates. The General Contractor shall perform an overall cleanup of the entire site as frequently as required, but not less frequently than each Friday afternoon.

B. All dumpsters used on project site shall be covered with lids or tarps securely fastened to prevent debris from blowing away.

C. Final Cleaning: General Contractor shall see to it that finished surfaces are clean and free of foreign matter upon completion of the work.

1. Pavings shall be swept clean. Glossy surfaces and stainless steel shall be polished. Equipment shall be free of spots and soil.

2. Drains, exterior and interior, shall be maintained clear of foreign matter.

3. Immediately prior to Owner occupying the project, General Contractor shall have all glass cleaned by a professional window washing concern. Work shall include removal of labels, paint spattering, excess glazing sealant, etc. Surfaces shall include mirrors, both sides of glass in windows, and doors. Mirrors shall NOT be cleaned with ammoniated products.

4. Upon completion of the work, the General Contractor and each subcontractor shall remove and dispose of all equipment and unused materials provided for his work.

5. After all outside clean-up work has been completed, interior clean-up shall be completed as follows:

a. Subcontractor for plumbing work shall wash and leave fixtures free of stains and all piping, etc., free of dust.

b. Subcontractor for heating work shall replace all filters with new filters if units have been used for temporary heating; and clean all motors.

c. Subcontractor for electrical work shall wash and clean all plates on switches and receptacles, light fixtures, etc., and shall vacuum clean insides of panels, etc.

d. The General Contractor shall, after the above work has been done, completely vacuum all floors and walls, dust and clean all cabinet and wall materials as well as exposed wood, and then shall clean all glass and scrub and clean all floors.

7. PROTECTION A. The General Contractor shall:

OEMA-2014-107 015001-2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

1. Provide and maintain barricades, warning signs, planking, and guard lights as necessary for protection of stored materials, curbs, sidewalks, streets and drives, the public, vendors, the Owner’s employees and the new constructions.

2. Use caution at all times to protect persons against injury resulting from job operations, equipment and materials moving onto and off the site, and standing equipment.

3. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities, sewer, etc., encountered during excavation work, to protect them from collapse or other type of damage until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into work for new construction, or can be properly backfilled.

4. Protect existing trees, shrubs, lawns and landscape work from damage, by providing guards and covering and maintaining plank covering over newly installed utility services, etc., to prevent damage by trucking or otherwise, including areas outside of grading and/or construction limits.

5. Provide protection against rain, snow, wind, ice, storms, or heat so as to maintain work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damage. At end of each day’s work new work likely to be damaged shall be covered. Snow and ice shall be removed as necessary for safe and proper execution of work.

6. Protect building from damage at all times from rain water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and other water, by providing enclosures, pumps and other equipment of sufficient capacity and configuration.

7. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

8. Notify, in writing, the owners of property which interfere with work and arrange with them for disposition of such property.

B. Any contractor or subcontractor causing damage to any of the Work shall have, at his own expense, the damaged work replaced or repaired to its original condition. Property damaged outside of Owner’s property line shall be repaired in accordance with requirements of its owner or the authority having jurisdiction.

C. Temporary Weather Closures:

1. General Contractor shall protect openings in exterior walls with temporary weatherproof closures to exclude damage from inclement weather and to retain interior heated and/or air conditioned air. Suitable provision shall be made for air passage to permit proper drying out of building. General Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to the construction or its contents due to the insufficiency of such protection.

2. Closures in designated emergency exits shall have plywood or other solid doors equipped with exit devices and exit signs as required by Code for the actual occupancy existing during the work.

8. TEMPORARY HEAT & VENTILATION

A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain heat and ventilation in enclosed construction areas throughout construction period as required to facilitate curing and drying of completed installations or to protect installed constructions from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Maintain an even temperature of at least 50°F for use of all trades. The General Contractor will be held responsible for damage to all materials and work due to improper heat and ventilation.


B. No “salamanders” or other fuel oil fired appliances will be permitted. Heating devices shall be smokeless units approved by Fire Marshall and Factory Mutual (FM) or Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Each fuel burning heating unit shall be properly vented through temporary ducts as required to dissipate noxious fumes and prevent discoloration of building materials. Propane fueled heating units shall only be used as approved in writing by Owner. Each heating unit shall be provided with the normal safety devices to prevent injury to building and workmen.

C. Costs of energy consumed for temporary heating shall be assumed by the General Contractor.

D. Temporary heaters shall not be placed so close to permanent constructions as to discolor surfaces or cause materials to be over-dried.

E. The permanent heating system shall not be used until dust-creating operations and painting are complete. Then, upon Owner's written approval for use of permanent heating system, General Contractor shall pay for all maintenance, and attendance required for operation of the permanent heating system up to the time of Substantial Completion.

F. When the building is ready to be accepted by the Owner, the contractor for heating and ventilating work shall leave the heating system clean and in like-new condition, with new filters fitted throughout.

G. Guarantee period for the permanent heating and ventilating systems shall not begin until Substantial Completion of total project.

H. The General Contractor shall remove all temporary heating and ventilating equipment upon conclusion of its use.

9. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary electric power service from public

utility sources for general power and light as required for site security and carrying on the work of all trades. Power service shall be at least 400 amps, single phase, 120/240 volts.

B. Cost of current used shall be paid by Contractor, direct to the utility company.

C. In addition to lighting required for security and for safe access around the areas of construction, the General Contractor shall provide an average illumination of at least 15 foot-candles on surfaces being constructed except that where exposed finishes are being installed, the average illumination provided shall be at least 30 foot-candles of WHITE LIGHT.

D. All temporary service wiring and equipment shall be installed and maintained in accordance with rules of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and the local electrical utility company.

E. Remove temporary electrical facilities as rapidly as allowed by the installation of the permanent electrical work.

F. Use of the permanent electrical system will be permitted for construction purposes. However, any use of the permanent electrical system before the project is accepted by the Owner, shall be subject to the approval of the Owner; and the Contractor shall replace all burned out bulbs, tubes or any other damaged elements, fixtures, receptacles, etc., and turn the entire electrical system over to the Owner whole and undamaged.

10. CONSTRUCTION WATER

A. The General Contractor, at his own expense, provide connections and extensions of services as required for drinking and construction operations. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. Before final acceptance, temporary connections and piping shall be removed and the source of supply restored to its original or better condition.

11. CONSTRUCTION TOILETS A. Permanent toilets shall not be used for construction toilet facilities.

OEMA-2014-107 015001-4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

B. The General Contractor shall furnish temporary hand wash and toilet facilities for the use of all personnel engaged on the Work. Commercially serviced portable chemical units shall be used unless approved otherwise. Quantity shall be sufficient for the maximum number of workers engaged for any particular day.

C. Toilet facilities shall be serviced at least twice weekly, including emptying of tanks, recharging of germicidal and deodorizing solutions, and scrubbing entire interior with a germicidal solution.

12. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. During construction period, the General Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire

protection per the requirements of jurisdictional authorities, for the construction site. The General Contractor shall also provide and maintain fire extinguishers and fire watches per the requirements of the Owner’s facilities insurance company.

B. Similarly, the General Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire protection for his temporary offices. In addition, each contractor who maintains an enclosed shed or trailer on the site for storage of materials, or workshop, or for the convenience of workmen, or office space, shall provide and maintain fire protection in each shed and trailer.

13. REPLACEMENT OF BROKEN GLASS

A. The General Contractor will be held responsible for glass that is damaged, broken or scratched due to the Work of this Contract and at completion of Contract shall replace such glass without charge to Owner.

B. It shall be the General Contractor’s prerogative to charge cost of replaced glass to the party responsible. The Work shall be turned over to the Owner with glazing complete and in perfect condition.

14. INCIDENTAL CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All cutting and patching shall be closely coordinated and superintended by the General Contractor.

B. Holes required by any contractor to be cut through completed construction shall be cut and patched by that contractor, except as directed otherwise by General Contractor.

C. Patching of cut surfaces shall be done by the subcontractor who did the cutting except as directed otherwise by the General Contractor, using mechanics accomplished in the kind of work being patched. Repairing and refinishing of disturbed surfaces shall use materials and workmanship conforming to that of the original work, according to industry standards and the standards for similar work on the Project.

END 015001.


DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 023213 - SOILS INVESTIGATIONS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. The Soils Investigation Report provides Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and is

intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. The Report is made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but is not a warranty of existing conditions. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer at the time of the report. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.

B. The Soils Investigation Report is not part of the Contract Documents.

C. Soils tests have been conducted at the site of this project Culver’s Restaurant of Janesville, Wisconsin by:

CGC, Inc. 2921 Perry Street, Madison, Wisconsin 53713 Ph: (608) 288-4100 Fax: (608) 000288-7887

A. This report is available, from the General Contractor, for contractor’s information and use. Please contact:

Jay Campbell Campbell Construction JD Inc. 810 Swan Drive, Suite A Mukwonago, Wisconsin 61103 Ph: (262) 436-4760 Fax: (262) 436-4761

B. The Owner does not represent that the findings are a warrant of subsurface conditions.

1.02. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

A. The Contractor shall make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary to perform the work of this project.

END 023213.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin SOILS INVESTIGATIONS 023213-1

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY

A. Work Included In This Section Features:

1. Formwork. 2. Steel bar reinforcement. 3. Steel mesh reinforcement for slabs-on-grade. 4. Fiber reinforcement alternative for slabs-on-grade. 5. Concrete foundation walls and footings. 6. Reinforced interior slabs-on-grade. 7. Under-slab moisture barrier. 8. Floor screed in cooler and freezer rooms. 9. Embedded items, such as sleeves, anchors, ties, etc., including items furnished by other trades

for embedment. 10. Preparation of concrete foundation surfaces to receive insulation. 11. Sealed concrete floor finish.

B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:

1. Fill under slabs ....................................................................................... Section 312000. 2. Furnishing of anchor bolts for wood sill plates ...................................... Section 055000. 3. Perimeter insulation on foundation walls ............................................... Section 072100. 4. Concrete pavings and curbs .................................................................... See Drawings. 5. Concrete for site utilities constructions .................................................. See Drawings.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Cooperate with other trades regarding installation of embedded items. Obtain templates, dimension, instructions, etc., from other trades or other contractors as required for setting items in concrete work.

B. The Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform concrete inspections and tests as hereinafter specified.

C. Comply with the latest edition of each of the following:

1. “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary” (ACI 318) 2. “Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete” (ASTM C 94) 3. “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction” (ACI 302.1) 4. “Specification for Hot Weather Concreting” (ACI 305.1) 5. “Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting” (ACI 306.1) 6. “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete” (ACI 304R) 7. “Specifications for Structural Concrete” (ACI 301)

D. Inform personnel that may be working with concrete as to requirements and the availability of ACI 301.

E. Provide protection during the construction period for all floor slabs, from oil, grease, stains, discoloration and other physical damage.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings pertaining to fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcements.

1. Comply with the ACI 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.”

2. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangements of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures.

C. Test Reports: Submit 3 copies of laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design tests including potential for alkali-silica reaction (ASR).

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on fiber reinforcement, additives, curing agents, sealers, grouts, joint materials and similar pre-manufactured products.

E. Certificates: Submit purchase receipt verifying grade and quantity of under-slab vapor barrier.

F. Concrete Truck Delivery Tickets: Submit delivery tickets indicating:

1. Delivery date and time dispatched 2. Name and location of project 3. Name of Contractor 4. Name of ready-mixed concrete producer 5. Truck number 6. Number of cubic yards of concrete in load 7. Class of concrete 8. Cement content in bags per cubic yard of concrete 9. Type and brand name of cement

10. Names and quantities of admixtures used 11. Maximum size of aggregate 12. Amount of water added at job, if any, and who authorized the addition.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Facings for Unexposed Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.

B. Form Coatings: Commercial formulation intended for form coating which will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and which will not impair bond or adhesion of subsequent treatments nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compound.

C. Form Ties: Configured so as to leave no metal closer than 1" to the surface of the concrete.

2.02. REINFORCEMENT

A. Materials:

1. Bars: Deformed new billet steel meeting ASTM A 615, Grade 60.

2. Tie Wire: Cold drawn steel wire meeting ASTM A 1064.

3. Reinforcement Fiber: One of the following: a. “Fibermesh” or other 100% virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers, MD Graded,

containing no reprocessed olefin, meeting ASTM C 1116 requirements for Type III,

OEMA-2014-107 033000-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

Performance Level I (I5), with a residual strength of 50 psi when tested on 4 beams from a single batch.

b. “Nycom” fibers.

4. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

5. Reinforcing Bar Holders: Galvanized or plastic coated when within 3/4" of exposed concrete surface.

B. Fabrication: Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice”.

1. No lapped splices for tension and compression bars unless noted on the Drawings or approved. Locate splices in temperature bars so that no more than half the bars are spliced at any point. Splices shall be lapped distances as indicated on Drawings.

2. Label bars to identify grade of steel and to facilitate placing.

C. Storage: Store reinforcing steel on supports above ground.

2.03. CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I for normal and Type III for high-early-strength.

B. Mixing Water: Fresh, free of oil, acid, alkalis, salts, organic matter and potable.

C. Aggregates: Per ASTM C 33, including freedom from potentially reactive constituents, as well as soft, thin elongated or laminated pieces, disintegrated stone, plant matter, trash and lumps of frozen or partly cemented material.

1. ASR Tested: Per ASTM C 1260. Submit test results.

2. Fine Aggregate: Natural hard, clean sand.

3. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed rock. a. Size 57 (1-1/2" top size) for structural elements 6" or more in thickness. b. Size 67 (3/4" top size) for slabs.

4. Furnish 3 copies of testing laboratory reports showing sieve analysis.

D. Admixtures:

1. Air-Entraining Admixture: Per ASTM C 260. Use one of the following: a. “Darex AEA” by W.R. Grace b. “Sika AER” by Sika Chemical Corp. c. “MasterAir VR 10” by Master Builders Co. (BASF Admixture Systems)

2. Water-Reducing Admixtures: Per ASTM C 494; one of the following:

a. “Pozzolith” by Master Builders Company. (BASF Admixture Systems) b. “Plast-o-Crete” by Sika Chemical Co. c. “WRDA” by W.R. Grace

3. Calcium Chloride: Shall NOT be used. Neither calcium chloride nor admixtures containing chloride salts shall be added to concrete.

2.04. ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Sheet Vapor Barrier:

1. ASTM E 1745, Class A, minimum thickness of 10 mils, with a maximum permeance of 0.03 perms. Include manufacturer's recommended pressure-sensitive tape.


B. Curing Materials:

1. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., conforming to AASHO M 182, Class 3.

2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or polyethylene coated burlap conforming to ASTM C 171.

3. Curing Compound: Liquid, membrane forming compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1, with fugitive dye, and guaranteed to not affect the bond, adhesion or effectiveness of floor hardeners or other applied finishes or surface treatments. Product shall be one of the following:

a. “Masterseal” by Master Builder’s Co. (BASF Building Systems) b. “Kure-N-Seal” by Sonneborn (BASF Building Systems) c. “CS-309” by W.R. Meadows d. “Resi Chem Clear Cure” by Symons Corp. (Dayton Superior)

C. Sealer: Non-epoxy type conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B and compatible with curing methods. Furnish with manufacturer’s standard guarantee.

1. Use one of the following:

a. “MasterKure CC 160WB” by BASF Building Systems. b. “TIAH” by W.R. Meadows c. “Cure & Seal 1315 EF” by Dayton Superior.

2.05. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Use an independent testing facility experienced in concrete mix design and acceptable to Owner for preparation of proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Owner.

B. Allow a minimum of 14 days prior to placing concrete for testing laboratory to design the mix for each type of concrete required.

C. The adequacy of the design mix shall be verified by tests on a minimum of 6 cylinders; 3 tested at least 7 days and 3 at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 192 and C 39 and by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143.

D. Submit 3 copies of the mix design and test results to Owner's Representative for review before any concrete is placed.

E. Concrete for Slabs on Grade: Add 1.5 lbs of fiber reinforcement per cubic yard except where wire mesh reinforcement is to be used.

F. Concrete for exterior foundations shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.52 and shall maintain a slump of 4" maximum, prior to addition of any admixtures. Incorporate an air entraining admixture yielding a total air content by volume of 4.5% to 7.5% for 3/4" top-sized aggregate and 4% to 7% for 1-1/2" top sized aggregate.

G. Concrete for slabs and interior foundations shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.46 and shall maintain a slump of 4" maximum, prior to addition of any admixtures.

H. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride salts shall not be used.

2.06. CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and transport in accordance with ASTM C 94, “Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete” and the established mix design.

B. Batch mixing at the site will not be allowed except on prior approval

C. Use admixtures only as specified in the established mix design.


3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION OF VAPOR BARRIER

A. Install vapor barrier directly under all interior concrete slabs on grade. Place barrier over the granular fill just before placement of the concrete; but do not place barrier until the granular fill has been inspected for compaction and grading per the requirements of Section 312000 “Earthwork.”

B. Lap the membrane sheet edges at least 12", with the top placed in the direction of the spreading of the concrete, and seal each seam continuously with approved waterproof tape. Turn membrane up on to wall and seal with tape to wall.

C. Seal all around pipes, conduits and other penetrations with tape.

D. Apply tape only to dry surfaces cleaned of dirt and other contaminates.

E. Just before membrane is to be covered, inspect membrane and repair all tears and visible holes with membrane manufacturer’s recommended sealing tape. For tears more than 12" long, lap a scrap piece of material to 12" beyond each side of the tear and seal all of the edges with tape.

3.02. FORMWORK

A. The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

2. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

3. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

a. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces (exposed surfaces and surfaces receiving insulation, and/or applied membranes/sheets).

b. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces (concealed surfaces except surfaces receiving insulation, and/or applied membranes/sheets).

B. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys into concrete to depth indicated on Drawings.

C. Coat forms with form-coating compound or non-staining form oil before setting reinforcing.

D. Side forms of footings may be omitted and concrete placed against the neat excavation only when acceptable to Soils Engineer and when appropriate credit is allowed.

3.03. PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: Do not place steel until after forms have been coated with the form release agent.

1. Place in accordance with CRSI “Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars” and approved Shop Drawings. Do not place bars that have not been fabricated to required tolerances.

2. Use bar supports, ties, anchors and other accessories to hold bars securely to prevent displacement by construction loads or the placing of concrete.

B. Clean reinforcing steel of oil, grease, scale, rust or other coating that will impair the bond.

C. Obtain approval of reinforcement placement before concrete is ordered.

3.04. INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS


A. Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached or embedded.

B. The concrete work shall be coordinated with the work of other trades to allow reasonable time to set sleeves, inserts and other accessories that must be in position before concrete is placed.

C. Setting Bearing Plates:

1. Clean bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces.

2. Set loose bearing or setting plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices and then grout into place.

3.05. JOINTS

A. Construction Joints:

1. Locate construction joints so as not to impair the strength of the structure.

2. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints unless detailed otherwise.

B. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Saw to 1/5 slab thickness, 1/8" wide, but not less than 1" deep. Saw the joints as soon as the concrete hardens sufficiently to prevent raveling. In no case shall the sawing be delayed beyond 12 hours after completion of the pour. Additional joints subject to approval.

3.06. CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Pre-Placement Inspection and Preparation of Soils: Do not place concrete until bearing soil, and/or compacted subgrades have been inspected, and forms and reinforcing have been cleaned and inspected. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used.

B. Placing Footings: Place on undisturbed clean surfaces, free from frost, ice, snow mud and water. When foundation is on dry soil or absorptive material, cover the area with waterproof sheathing paper or wet down the surfaces receiving concrete.

C. Placement by Chute: Maintain continuous concrete flow down chutes. Use metal or metal lined wood chute, sloped to not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal, nor more than 1 vertical to 2 horizontal. Provide discharge chute and baffle plate to prevent segregation. Maintain discharge end as near deposit surface as practicable. When pouring is intermittent, discharge the chute contents into hoppers. Clean the chute thoroughly before and after each run. Discharge waste material and flush water outside of the forms.

D. Cold Weather Placement: Per ACI 306.1 “Recommended Practice for Winter Concreting.”

1. Do not place concrete when ambient temperature may fall below 40°F within 24 hours of placement or below 30°F during the succeeding 6 days unless proper provision has been made for heating and/or insulating concrete.

2. Temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be 50°F to 70°F.

E. Hot Weather Placement: Per ACI 305.1 “Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.”

F. Consolidation: Vibrate, spade and rod the concrete so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and corners, eliminating air and stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Using vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically only.


3.07. FINISHING

A. Form Removal:

1. Formwork for walls may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations.

2. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be cured by one of the methods specified under CURING AND PROTECTION.

B. Finishing of Formed Surfaces: Remove all form tie ends and fill form tie holes and holes more than 1/2" deep with mortar made from 1 part portland cement to 2 parts sand.

1. Rough Form Finish: After ties are removed and tie holes filled with mortar, surfaces indicated may be left with texture imparted by the form’s facing material.

2. Smooth Form Finish: After ties are removed and tie holes filled with mortar, surfaces receiving smooth form finish shall have fins and other projections removed, honeycombs filled and other defects made smooth. Apply to surfaces to also receive smooth-rubbed finish.

a. Smooth-Rubbed Finish (where noted on Drawings): Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

C. Slabs:

1. Float Finish: Apply to all interior slabs and to exterior platform slabs.

a. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until surface water has disappeared. Float the concrete with a wood bullfloat to an even surface without drawing laitance-producing fines to the surface.

b. At exterior slabs, re-float surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Leave surfaces free of ridges created by edges of float.

c. Finished surface shall be flat to a tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with 10-ft straightedge. Unless indicated otherwise, slope floors toward drains at 1/8" per foot starting 15" from drains.

2. Trowel Finish: Apply to all interior slab surfaces.

a. After floating, begin first troweling after slab has hardened such that laitance-producing fines will not be worked to the surface.

b. Where carpet, resilient flooring or concrete sealer are to be installed, trowel again after first troweling is complete and surface has hardened sufficient to ring the trowel, troweling to a burnished finish (but without “burning” the surface).

c. Leave surfaces free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and with a surface plane true to a tolerance of 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Grind smooth any surface defects that may telegraph through applied floor covering system. Except where slabs will be exposed to view, fill depressions outside of tolerances with latex filler.

3. Sealed Concrete Finish: Apply to trowel finished floors where indicated.

a. Toward end of construction period, apply floor sealer to indicated areas in accordance with sealer manufacturer’s recommended surface preparation and application requirements.

b. Floors that are stained, marked, grease or paint spotted or otherwise discolored shall be thoroughly cleaned and acid etched prior to application of sealer.


3.08. CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Restrict rate of moisture loss and maintain relatively constant temperatures as necessary for the hydration of the cement to achieve the required strength and hardness. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessive hot or cold temperatures. Prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period.

B. Curing of Floor Slabs Scheduled to Receive Ceramic Tile and Quarry Tile: Immediately following any finishing operations, keep concrete continuously moist by any of the following methods until end of curing period:

1. Burlap covering kept continuously wet. 2. Wetting and covering with polyethylene or waterproof paper covering. 3. Moisture resistant insulating blankets. 4. Spraying with curing compound: NOT ALLOWED.

C. Curing of Floor Slabs to Receive Carpet: Immediately following the finishing operation, keep concrete continuously moist by any of the following methods until end of curing period:

1. Burlap covering kept continuously wet. 2. Wetting and covering with polyethylene or waterproof paper covering. 3. Rewetting concrete as required. 4. Moisture resistant insulating blankets. 5. Spraying with curing compound at rate required to meet ASTM C 309 criteria.

D. Curing of Footings and Foundation Walls: Same as for floors receiving carpet.

E. Duration of Curing: At least 165 cumulative hours, not necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50°F. If high-early strength concrete has been used, the final curing shall continue for an accumulated 3 days.

F. Cold Weather: Protect and cure in accordance with ACI 306.1. Protect subgrade beneath footings, foundations, slabs, etc., from frost action. Backfill, insulate, and/or heat as required to prevent damage due to frost heaving and unequal settling after thaw.

G. Hot Weather: Protect and cure in accordance with ACI 305.1.

H. Sealed Concrete Floor Finish: Apply to areas scheduled to receive “sealer.”

1. Toward end of construction period, apply floor sealer to indicated areas in accordance with sealer manufacturer’s recommended surface preparation, application requirements and number of coats.

2. Floors that are stained, discolored, spotted, contaminated with oily residues or otherwise discolored shall be thoroughly cleaned and acid etched before application of sealer.

3.09. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTS

A. Cooperate with the laboratory in every respect by arranging material for sampling and supplying necessary facilities at the job site for making the field tests and storing specimens.

B. Tests shall be made for each 50 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof, but not less than 2 for each day’s pour. Perform the following tests:

1. Compression Test: Make a minimum of 3 standard 6"x12" cylinders for testing, one at the age of 7 days, and one for testing at 28 days, unless otherwise directed. If compression tests are to be used for determining when forms may be removed, make at least 2 additional cylinders and cure on job site in accordance with ASTM C 31.

2. Tests for Air-Entrainment: Per ASTM C 231, on a random basis, as determined by the Owner's Representative.


3. Slump Test: Per ASTM C 143. Contractor shall provide cone and make tests whenever requested by Owner's Representative. Test each and every truckload. 1/2" tolerance allowed each way.

4. Additional Tests: If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative there is any question as to the quality of the concrete already placed, make additional tests as directed. Tests may be either compression tests on cored cylinders, per ASTM C 42; or load tests as outlined in ACI 318; or as directed. These tests shall be paid for by the Contractor.

C. Evaluation of Tests: In accordance with ACI 214-83.

D. Test Reports: Furnish for all tests. Report must show exact location of work represented by samples and tests.

END 033000.


DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY



1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortars and grouts. 3. Masonry anchorages.


1. Manufactured stone veneer .................................................................. Section 047300.

1.02. CODES AND STANDARDS

A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the standards of masonry installation described in the recommendations of:

1. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) 2. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Spec. (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602).


A. Sources of Supply: Obtain each kind of masonry unit from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color.

1.04. SUBMITTALS


B. Submit Product Data for:

1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout materials including additives. 3. Mortar and grout mix compositions. 4. Masonry clip angles.

1.05. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Cement, Lime, Etc: Deliver in original unopened packaging, plainly marked with manufacturer’s original product identification labels.

1. Mortar materials in broken or water-stained packages or which have hardened shall not be incorporated into the work but shall be immediately removed from the site.

B. Protection from Damp: Protect all masonry materials from precipitation and dampness.

1. Sand and Aggregates: Store on clean surfaces isolated from below-grade moisture.

2. Cement and Lime: Store cement and lime isolated from below-grade moisture and away from cold concrete floors and masonry.

C. Handling: Handle masonry units so as to avoid chipping and breakage.

1.06. JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protection From Precipitation:

1. Maintain masonry free of accumulations of water.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver's Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin UNIT MASONRY 042000-1

2. During erection, cover tops of walls with strong, weatherproof membranes, extending a minimum of 2 feet down both sides and securely held in place.

B. Masonry deemed to be frozen shall be removed from the site.

2. PRODUCTS 2.01. MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Type: Medium weight hollow load bearing units made with ASTM C 33 and ASTM C 331 aggregates to conform to ASTM C 90, including a total linear drying shrinkage less than .045%.

a. Normal weight units made with ASTM C 33 aggregates and meeting the same requirements may also, at contractor's option, be used.

2. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

3. Size and Shape: 8" x 16" nominal face size; thicknesses as indicated.

4. Cores: 2-core or 3-core block may be used.

5. Moisture Limits: Units shall be cured in a moisture-controlled atmosphere so that when delivered to job site the weight of water contained in the units shall not exceed 35% of the fully saturated capacity of the block.

6. Moisture content of units stored at the site shall be maintained so as to not exceed 35% of block saturation capacity.

2.02. ANCHORAGES

A. 2” x 2” galvanized steel clip angles.

2.03. REINFORCEMENT AND TIES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Specifications and Drawings, provide products by the following:

1. Dur-O-Wal (Hohmann & Barnard) 2. Heckman Building Products 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America (Wire-Bond)

B. Interior Partition Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Factory welded units fabricated from cold drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82.

1. Type: Ladder or truss type. 2. Side Rods: Two deformed #9 wires. 3. Cross Rods: Plain #9 wire. 4. Width: 2" less than nominal thickness of wall. 5. Finish: Mill galvanized.

2.04. CONCEALED FLASHINGS

A. Flashing for In-Wall and Thru-Wall Conditions: minimum 40 mil rubberized asphalt membrane, faced with a cross-laminated polyethylene film 8 mil thick on one side. Use one of the following:

OEMA-2014-107 042000-2 UNIT MASONRY Culver's Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

1. W.R. Grace “Perm-a-Barrier” 2. Nervastral “Bitu-Rap” 3. Polyguard “400 Flashing” 4. Hohmann & Barnard “Flex-Flash Flashing” 5. Carlisle “CCW-705-TWF”

B. Drip Edge for Concealed Flashings: Shop fabricated 24-gauge stainless steel, depth as required for masonry thickness, formed with loose hemmed drip edge on one side and projecting out 1/2" at 45°; or pre-manufactured drip edge such as “Flex-Flash Drip Edge” by Hohmann & Barnard or “Drip Edge” by Polyguard.

C. Surface Primer: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended surface conditioner.

D. Mastic Sealant: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended mastic sealant for repairing membrane and sealing edges, joints and punctures.

E. Setting Mastic For Metal Drip: Same mastic as used for repair of flashing membrane.

2.05. MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Expansion Control Joint Accessories:

1. Bond Breaker Strips: No. 15 asphalt roofing felt conforming to ASTM D 226, or No. 15 coal tar roofing felt conforming to ASTM D 227.

2. Premolded Control Joint Strips for Concrete Block: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated.

B. Compressible Joint Filler: Fire-rated safing insulation (mineral fiber insulation), full width and thickness of joint.

C. Weeps: One of the following:

1. “Mortar Trap Weep Vents” by Hohmann & Barnard. 2. “Weep Vent” by Mortar Net Solutions. 3. “Weep Mesh” by Advanced Building Products, Inc.

D. Cavity Cell Dividers: Compressible backer rod of closed-cell polyethylene foam as used to back sealants in wall joints. Size the backer rod as required to fit tightly throughout its length without forcing block veneer out of place before mortar sets.

E. Concrete Block Cleaning Agent:

1. Split-Face & Standard CMU: ProSoCo “Custom Masonry Cleaner” or approved equal.

2.06. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, non-staining, Type I, gray and/or white as required to produce a cured mortar of the required light (but not stark white) color.

B. Masonry Cement: Not permitted.

C. Hydrated Lime: Conforming to ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Sand: Conforming to ASTM C 144, except that 100% shall pass the #8 sieve and 15% - 30% shall pass the #50 sieve.


E. Additives: Except as indicated below, not allowed, including calcium chloride or other chloride bearing formulations, as well as any air entraining agents.

1. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.

F. Water: Clean, potable, free from oil, soluble salts, acids, alkalis, organic impurities and other deleterious materials.

2.07. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar Mix Proportions: Type N lime cement mortar per ASTM C 270: 1 part portland cement, 6 parts damp loose sand, 1 part hydrated lime, by volume, having average, in-field, not lab compressive strength of 750 psi at 28 days.

B. Combining Ingredients:

1. Measurements: Measure ingredients precisely.

a. Keep water-cement ratio precise from batch to batch.

b. Accurately measure sand in damp, loose condition; measurement of sand by shovelful will NOT be allowed. Allow for contraction and expansion of sand’s volume as it dries out and it gains moisture.

2. Mixing Mortar: Mix ingredients thoroughly in motorized mechanical batch mixer according to ASTM C 270 procedures for at least 3 minutes but no more than 5 minutes after all material is in mixer. Mix only as much mortar as needed for immediate use.

a. Cold Weather: When air temperature is 40°F or below, keep water warmed to above 70°F but do not allow it to exceed 160°F. When heating sand, heat slowly and evenly. Scorched sand shall be discarded.

3. Mixing Grout: Mix thoroughly in mechanical batch mixer according to ASTM C 476 procedures; hand mixing not allowed without approval. Grout may be premixed and delivered per ASTM C 94. Use only enough water to produce a workable consistency, except that for placement by pump more water may be added.

a. Cold Weather: When air temperature is 40°F or below, mix grout according to cold weather restrictions for mortar, and deliver at 70°F-120°F.

4. Admixtures: Do not use except as specifically allowed by Architect.

5. Pre-Mixed Mortars: In addition to regular on-site motor-mixed mortars, “Silo-Mix” or PCI “Spec-Mix” may be used. Truck delivered batch mixing shall conform to ASTM C 1142.

6. Repointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix dry materials together before adding any water. Then add only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add additional water in small portions until a workable but stiff consistency is reached.

7. Mortar Mixers, Boxes and Tools: Keep clean; thoroughly clean equipment and tools between batches and at end of each day’s work.

C. Retempering:

1. Partially hardened mortar may be re-tempered to replace water lost through evaporation.

2. Do not retemper mortars out of mixer for more than 2-1/2 hours; but, rather, dispose of such mortar.

3. Repointing mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened repointing mix.

OEMA-2014-107 042000-4 UNIT MASONRY Culver's Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

3. EXECUTION 3.01. INSTALLATION – GENERAL

A. Do not build with wet or damp masonry units. Use only thoroughly dry units.

B. Lay-up masonry plumb and true to line and to levels indicated, with level courses and accurately spaced units. Do not use cut masonry units where full units can be used.

C. Cutting: Make all unit cuts exposed to view, including those for boxes, with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. After cutting, clean sawdust from pores of block.

D. Frost: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. Do not build on frozen work. Removed ice and snow from masonry beds by applying heat until the surface is dry to the touch.

E. Organic Materials: Do not build materials subject to deterioration into the work.

F. Stopping and Resuming Work: Step unfinished work; use toothing only when approved. Remove loose masonry and mortar. Clean joining area and lightly dampen brick before starting new work.

G. Mortar Boxes and Tools: Thoroughly clean between batches and at end of each day’s work.

3.02. BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Apply force to masonry units when setting into place in order to maximize bed bond and head bond.

B. Adjustments: Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar.

C. Corners: Fully bond and interlock corners. Fill snap-line holes. Do not expose cut masonry faces to weather.

3.03. COURSING, BOND PATTERNS AND SPECIAL SHAPES

A. Place masonry to levels indicated. Keep vertical joints aligned and plumb from course to course.

B. Joint Widths: 3/8", unless shown otherwise, except for minor variations up to 1/8" required to maintain bond alignment. This also specifically includes head joints.

C. Bond: Lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Course 3 brick units and 3 mortar joints to equal 8".

3.04. PROTECTION

A. At day’s end and when precipitation is anticipated, cover tops of unfinished walls with plastic sheeting to prevent moisture infiltration.

B. Protect exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.

END 042000.


DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

SECTION 047300 - MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Exterior wall manufactured stone veneer facing with sill/watertable and trim pieces. 2. Interior wall manufactured stone veneer facing with non-structural lintel and trim pieces. 3. Mortars and grouts. 4. Concealed flashings and metal drips. 5. Hot and/or cold weather protection including any heat or temporary shelters required.


1. Wood framing, sheathing and weather resistive barrier ......................... Section 061000. 2. EIFS........................................................................................................ Section 072400. 3. Joint sealants .......................................................................................... Section 079200.


A. The Contractor shall verify the pattern selection and color of the manufactured stone with the Owner.

B. Sources of Supply: Obtain primary manufactured stone veneer and trim from one source and manufactured by one firm, of uniform texture and color or uniform blend in the variation thereof, for each kind required, for each continuous area or visually related areas. Provide secondary materials only of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

C. Manufacturer:

1. Must have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the supply of comparable stone veneer.

2. Must provide field service representative.

D. Installers:

1. Must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience installing manufactured stone masonry veneer and have completed a minimum of ten (10) projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall be approved by the manufactured stone veneer manufacturer.

2. Must examine all parts of supporting structure and conditions which stonework is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with stonework installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3. Must review Installation procedures and coordination of other related work with the Architect, Contractor and subcontractors whose work will be affected by the stonework.

4. Must, when directed by the Architect and/or Contractor, meet at the site and review installation and coordination procedures, prior to the start of stonework.

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product provided, including:

1. Mortar and grout materials including additives. 2. Mortar and grout mix compositions.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin MAUFACTURED STONE VENEER 047300-1

3. Concealed wall flashings and metal drips.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing dimensions, sections and provisions for application to back-up substrate. Indicate layout, show profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.

D. Samples: Architect shall make preliminary selection of cultured stone and based upon that preliminary selection, the supplier shall:

1. Submit 3 sets of samples not less than 8” x 12” in size of each color, grade and finish of manufactured stone required. Include in each set the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the completed work.

2. Submit samples with at least one mortar bonded joint per set.

E. Submit manufacturers written maintenance instructions.

F. Submit executed copies of product and installation warranties.

1.04. MOCKUP

A. Provide mock up as described below and as illustrated on Drawings. Owner may choose to reduce the scope of the mock up.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with the exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS), fiber cement siding, aluminum storefront system, glazing, joint sealant and other material contractors and suppliers in erecting a minimum 4’ x 4’ mockup for approval by the Owner. The mock up shall include:

1. For manufactured stone portion: field of stone showing full range of stone color and shapes to be provided, mortar, stone sill/watertable, return of sill/watertable at pier, vertical control joint through stone and sill/watertable, penetration detail, flashing/ weep screed/ drip at bottom of stone.

2. For EIFS portion: field of EIFS showing colors and texture, horizontal reveal, penetration detail, backwrap and flashing at bottom of EIFS, vertical stone / EIFS joint, and joint with EIFS and aluminum frame.

C. Mockup shall be erected in a location as approved by Owner.

D. Mockup shall be erected prior to construction of the exterior walls and shall be independent of the building. The approved mockup shall be remain in place to be used the compare with the completed exterior wall surfaces. Upon approval of the Owner, the mockup shall be removed from the site.


A. Cement, Lime, Etc:

1. Deliver in original unopened packaging, plainly marked with manufacturer’s original product identification labels.

2. Mortar materials in broken or water-stained packages or which have hardened shall not be incorporated into the work but shall be immediately removed from the site.

B. Deliver stone materials in manufacturer’s original unopened and undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Protect all stonework materials, from weather, moisture and contamination with earth and foreign materials.

C. Handle stone to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage.

D. Store stone on non-staining wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining waterproof membrane. Place and stack skids and stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking of stone.

OEMA-2014-107 047300-2 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin


A. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations and limitations for environmental conditions.

B. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace stonework damaged by frost or freezing.

C. Protect stonework against freezing. Heat materials and provide temporary protection to prevent freezing of stonework materials. Comply with requirements of governing code.

D. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not use calcium chloride to thaw ice in anchor holes or slots. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents, nor use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

E. During all seasons, protect partially completed stonework against weather when work is not in progress. Cover tops of walls with strong waterproof, non-staining membrane extending at least 2” down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.

1.07. WARRANTY

A. Provide Manufacturer’s standard fifty (50) year warranty against defects in workmanship and materials of manufactured stone veneer products.

B. Provide Installer’s standard one (1) year warranty against defects in installation of manufactured stone veneer products.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer: Provide manufactured stone veneer and trim of manufacturer and in category, style

and color indicated on Drawings.

B. Manufactured stone veneer, sill/watertable, lintel and trim: Meet ICC-ES AC-51. All trim shall be manufactured of materials and colors to match field stone. Provide units as noted and identified on drawings and as follows:

1. Preformed outside corners with alternating long and short legs.

2. Sills/watertables with positive slope away from building (minimum 12%) and complying with details on Drawings.

3. Specially formed units with flat face for use at penetrations.

C. Mortar and Grout Materials:

1. Cement: Provide white cement of one of the following kinds.

a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except complying with the staining requirements of ASTM C 91 for not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali.

b. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, and complying with the non-staining requirements.

2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

3. Sand: ASTM C 144, except graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve for 1/4" and narrower joints.

a. For white pointing mortar, furnish natural white sand or ground white stone meeting specified requirements.

b. For colored pointing mortar, furnish marble, granite or other sound stone, meeting specified grading requirements for sand, as required to meet Architect's sample.


4. Additive for Moisture Resistance: Ammonium stearate, aluminum tri-stearate or calcium stearate.

5. Water: Clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work.

6. Mixes for Scratch Coat, Stone Installation Mortar, and Grout: Comply with building code requirements of 50 PSI shear bond when tested in accordance with ASTM C482. Components shall be non-staining. Provide mixes as recommended in stone manufacturer’s printed instructions for each step of installation and as required for specific job conditions.

7. Mortar Mix: Non-staining, portland cement/lime mortar, complying with ASTM C 270, Type N, using specified materials, mixed in following proportions: one part non-staining Portland Cement, one part lime and six parts mason’s sand.

8. Grout Mix: Non-staining, masonry cement/sand mortar, Type N, using specified materials, mixed in following proportions: one part non-staining Masonry Cement, two and one half parts finely graded clean mason’s sand as per manufactured stone manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Stonework Accessories:

1. Expanded Metal Lath: 2.5 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60.

2. Flashing for In-Wall and Thru-Wall Conditions: minimum 40 mil rubberized asphalt membrane, faced with a cross-laminated polyethylene film 8 mil thick on one side. Use one of the following:

a. W.R. Grace “Perm-a-Barrier” b. Nervastral “Bitu-Rap” c. Polyguard “400 Flashing” d. Hohmann & Barnard “Flex-Flash Flashing” e. Carlisle “CCW-705-TWF”

3. Drip Edge for Concealed Flashings: Shop fabricated 24-gauge stainless steel, depth as required for stone thickness, formed with loose hemmed drip edge on one side and projecting out 1/2" at 45°; or pre-manufactured drip edge such as “Flex-Flash Drip Edge” by Hohmann & Barnard or “Drip Edge” by Polyguard.

4. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners, of size recommended by manufactured stone manufacturer for substrate and condition and complying with ASTM C1063.

E. Fabrication: Fabricate stone as shown and in compliance with the recommendations of the stone supplier.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive manufactured stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of manufactured stone masonry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. Install manufactured stone over stud wall sheathing and weather resistive barrier in accordance with the recommendations of the stone supplier, Masonry Veneer Manufacturers Association “Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry,” all applicable codes and as follows:


1. Dry stacked installation will NOT be allowed.

2. Before application of stone, layout stone to assure a consistent variety of shapes and colors.

3. Do not use stone units with chips, cracks, voids, stains or other defects which might be visible in the finished work.

4. Clean stone before setting by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh fillers or abrasives. If not thoroughly wet at time of setting, drench or sponge stone. Do not wet expansion or control joint surfaces.

5. Execute stonework by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at the site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.

6. Install concealed flashing membrane as shown on drawings.

7. Fasten metal lath, over the weather resistant barrier, to vertical structural members in compliance with ASTM C1063, except fasteners shall penetrate the vertical structural members a minimum of 1 inch (not including the depth of the sheathing) as recommended by the Masonry Veneer Manufacturers Association “Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry”.

8. Apply scratch coat to lath. Make certain lath is covered completely with a thin coat (1/2” to 3/4” thick).

9. Use a metal scraper to lightly rake horizontal grooves in the scratch coat once mortar is thumbprint hard.

10. Moist cure scratch coat to reduce cracking.

11. When scratch coat is cured and immediately before applying the manufactured stone veneer, dampen scratch coat so surface appears wet but has no standing water, re-dampen as needed while applying stone. Apply the manufactured stone veneer as follows:

a. Mix mortar to a creamy consistency. Mix for a minimum of 5 minutes.

b. Prepare stone as required. Make certain surfaces are free of dirt, sand or loose particles. If necessary, wash stone completely. If surface is dry damping with brush, but do not saturate.

c. Trowel mortar onto scratch coat 1/2” thick.

d. Clean stone and slightly dampen the back side.

e. Apply thick coat of mortar onto back side of stone.

f. Press stone into mortar, rotating slightly, forcing some of the mortar to squeeze out. Any mortar forced out beyond the finished point or on the stone surface must be removed with trowel, joint tool or brush before the mortar is allowed to set up.

g. Use a grout bag or trowel to fill all joints. As mortar stiffens, tool to desired depth and brush off all excess. Do not allow any mortar to harden on the face of the stone.

3.03. REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stone units which are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged. Where

directed, remove and replace units which do not match adjoining stonework. Provide new matching units, install as specified and seal joints to eliminate evidence of replacement. Reseal defective and unsatisfactory joints and as required to provide a neat, uniform appearance.

B. Clean stonework using clean water and stiff-bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers.


3.04. PROTECTION

A. Installer shall advise Contractor of proper procedures required to protect the stonework from deterioration, discoloration or damage until final acceptance of work.

B. Normal weathering of stonework, which will be exposed to the weather after completion, will be acceptable, provided other conditions and activities do not interfere and result in and unacceptable condition.

END 047300.


DIVISION 5 – METALS

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes and pipes which are not part of the steel structural framing or other metal systems in other Sections of the Specifications. The items of this Section include but are not necessarily limited to the following:

a. Sill plate anchor bolts. b. Steel pipe bollards. c. Supports for solid surface countertops. d. Aluminum ladder. e. Dumpster gate metal framing. f. Aluminum or galvanized steel guard rails. g. Miscellaneous steel shapes as noted on Drawings.

2. Anchorages of type appropriate to the supporting structure and as required to provide a sturdy installation resistant to all reasonable loads.

3. Cutting, reinforcing, drilling and tapping as required to erect the work and to fit it with work provided under other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections: 1. Concrete fill for bollards .......................................................................... Section 033000. 2. Boards for dumpster gate ......................................................................... Section 062000 3. Finish painting .......................................................................................... Section 099000.


A. Field Measurements: Take prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication, where possible. Take measurements in time, so as to avoid delaying job progress. Allow for trimming and fitting.

B. Qualifications of Welders: Welding operators for shop fabrication shall be qualified, in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualifications Procedure.”

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. AISI, Steel Products Manual, Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel. 2. ANSI A58.1, Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures. 3. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code.” 4. Aluminum Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429 5. OSHA: 1910.27 and 1926.1053. 6. All applicable building codes having jurisdiction.

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Make Submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for all miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1

1. Submit shop drawings for: a. Steel bollards. b. Aluminum ladder. c. Metal frames for dumpster gate. d. Aluminum or galvanized steel guard rail.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

1. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36.

2. Steel Tubing: Hot-formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501.

3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; weight as indicated, galvanized: Diameter as noted on drawings.

4. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

5. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

6. Aluminum Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429.

B. Fasteners, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum and stainless steel regardless of location.

2. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts ASTM A 563; and where indicated, flat washers.

3. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.

C. Anchor Bolts: Unfinished threaded fasteners per ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

D. Rail Post Sleeve Forms: “EZ Sleeve” as produced by Auciello Iron Works, Inc., Hudson, Massachusetts, tel. 508-568-8382.

E. Gate Hardware: Unless hardware is stainless steel, all steel hardware shall be hot dip galvanized.

F. Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout having a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days and complying with ASTM C 1107. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. “Masterflow” by Master Builder (BASF Building Systems). 2. “Five Star Grout” by Five Star Products, Inc. 3. “588 Grout” by W.R. Meadows.

OEMA-2014-107 055000-2 METAL FABRICATIONS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

H. Metal Primer Paint: SSPC Paint 13, Red or Brown, or Fed. Spec. TT-P-31, Paint Iron Oxide, Ready Mixed Red and Brown.

I. Touch-Up Paint for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich, inorganic cold galvanizing compound having a minimum of 80% zinc dust in the dry film, such as Carboline Carbozinc 11 Series or Carboweld Series; or Z.R.C. Worldwide Galvilite.

2.02. SHOP FINISH

A. Shop Painting: One-coat shop paint in accordance with Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) System Guide No. 7.00, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that will be inaccessible after assembly or erection.

1. Extent: Shop prime paint bollards.

2. Surface Preparation: Remove scale, rust, grease, oils and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat of paint.

B. Galvanizing (exterior items and items in exterior walls):

1. Coating Weights: Items indicated to be galvanized shall be hot-dip galvanized according to the following specifications:

a. Assembled steel products: ASTM A 386, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. b. Structural steel shapes: ASTM A 123, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. c. Steel hardware: ASTM A 153, 1.25 oz./sq. ft.

2. Fabrication: Galvanize only after fabrication. Drilling, welding and other fabrication, except bolting, shall be completed before galvanizing. Welds shall be free of slag and residue.

3. Quenching: DO NOT QUENCH GALVANIZED ITEMS TO BE PAINTED. Newly galvanized items NOT scheduled for painting shall be passivated in a water quench.

4. Galvanizer's Affidavit: Galvanizer shall inspect galvanizing after dipping and submit notarized affidavit certifying compliance with these specifications.

5. Grade Stamp: Stamp each item, indicating ASTM designation and weight of coating.

2.03. FABRICATION - GENERAL

A. Sizes and Thicknesses: As shown, or, if not shown, as required to produce adequate strength and durability in the finished products. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

B. Preassembly in Shop: Preassemble the items in the shop to greatest extent possible, to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Dissimilar Metals: Wherever dissimilar metals come into contact, insert lead washers, spacers or gaskets between them to provide electrolytic insulation.

D. Workmanship: Form exposed work true to line and level, with accurate angles and surfaces and straight, sharp smooth edges.

E. Welds: Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with recommendations of American Welding Society. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush.

F. Items to be Galvanized: Complete drilling, welding and other fabrication, except bolting, before galvanizing. Clean welds of slag and residue. Provide vent holes as required.


2.04. FABRICATION SPECIFICS

A. Aluminum Ladder: As detailed and noted on drawings and as follows:

1. Acceptable Model & Manufacturer: No. 560 by Alaco Ladder Co.

2. Acceptable Other Manufacturers: Comparable models of ACL Industries, Inc. Precision Ladders LLC.

3. Components:

a. Size: 1'-8" wide, height as shown on drawings.

b. Materials shall be constructed of 6061-T6 aluminum and consists of:

1) Rungs shall be 1 1/8” round serrated with cast aluminum rung connectors secured to 2 7/8” channel side rails with 4 solid aircraft rivets for a combined shear strength of over 3600 lbs.

2) Offset Mounts: Attach on the ladder offset mounts that will attach ladder to wall, at distance from wall shown on Drawings.

3) Security Anti-Access Door: 6061-T6 alloy mill finish formed from .063” sheet extending from 48" above the ground to the height shown on drawings, complete with lugs to receive a pad lock.

B. Dumpster Gate Framing: Metal components as detailed and noted on the drawings, galvanized.

C. Bollards (Pipe Guards):

1. Construction: Schedule 80 steel pipe of sizes indicated, hot dip galvanized.

2. Pipe Guards (Bollard) Coverings: PVC (HDPE) pipe and cap covering of sizes as shown on drawings. Acceptable products as supplied by:

a. Post Guard:

Ph: 1-866-737-8900 Fax: 1-248-354-4095 Email: [email protected]

b. Glass City Plastics:

Ph: 1-419-861-2659 Fax: 1-419-861-2342 Email: [email protected]

D. Guard Rails: Contractor’s option to provide natural aluminum or powder coated galvanized steel as follows:

1. Galvanized Steel Rail System: Nominal 1-1/4" steel pipe, except as indicated otherwise on Drawings. Use standard weight and heavy weight pipe as required to withstand loads established by all applicable codes. Design the connections to withstand all uniform and concentrated loads required by codes with:

a. Post Receivers: Furnish pipe post sleeves or post hole forms to concrete installers for setting of pipe posts and verify proper placement in formwork; or core the cured concrete to receive the pipe posts.

1) Rail Post Sleeve Forms: “EZ Sleeve” as produced by Auciello Iron Works, Inc., Hudson, Massachusetts, tel. 508-568-8382.

2) Pipe Sleeve Material: Same material and finish as pipe rails. b. Finish: Powder coated prime shop coat with finish coats by Section 099000 “Painting”

Contractor.

OEMA-2014-107 055000-4 METAL FABRICATIONS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

mailto:[email protected]


2. Aluminum Rail System: Nominal 1-1/2" pipe, except as indicated otherwise on Drawings. Use weights of pipe as required to withstand loads established by all applicable codes. Design the connections to withstand all uniform and concentrated loads required by codes with:

a. Post Support: Set railings in aluminum pipe sleeves anchored in concrete using non-shrink setting grout sloped away from railing to provide for water drainage.

b. Finish: Natural aluminum finish.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. General: Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.

B. Joints: Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairlines joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat.

C. Bollards:

1. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard.

2. Fill bollards solidly with concrete. If bollard is to be field painted, mound top surface of concrete to shed water. If bollard is to receive bollard cover, strike concrete flat with top of pipe.

3.02. TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END 055000.


DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Wood framing and blocking. 2. Engineered wood beams. 3. Plywood or oriented strand board (OSB) wall sheathing. 4. Plywood roof sheathing. 5. Air infiltration barrier and weather resistive barrier. 6. Hardware for wood framing such as anchors, hangers, straps, etc. 7. Edge blocking for membrane roofing. 8. Framing and blocking for sheet metal work. 9. Furnishing and setting of frames, wood bucks, etc., required for masonry work.

10. Miscellaneous carpentry for protection and for temporary constructions.


1. Concrete formwork ................................................................................ Section 033000. 2. Installation of anchor bolts for sill plates ............................................... Section 033000. 3. Wood trusses, including connectors ....................................................... Section 061753. 4. Batt and blanket insulation ..................................................................... Section 072100. 5. Gypsum sheathing substrate at EIFS ..................................................... Section 072400. 6. Installation of hollow metal door frames ................................................ Section 081113. 7. Metal stud framing ................................................................................. Section 092116. 8. Curbs for air handling equipment ........................................................... See Drawings. 9. Shoring for excavations .......................................................................... Section 312000.

1.02. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit under the provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Wood Treatment: Submit certification from treatment plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained and conformance with specified standards.

C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate results of specified testing.

1.03. PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing air infiltration barrier and weather resistive barrier, field test the adhesion of the joint system between the two as follows:

1. Locate test joints on same substrates to be used in final construction. 2. Perform a minimum of two tests, for each of the following conditions, on the air infiltration

barrier / weather resistive barrier joint system.

a. Test self-adhered flashing on weather resistive barrier. b. Test Adhesive/Primer and self-adhered flashing on weather resistive barrier.

3. Schedule field tests to allow for materials to cure prior to testing. 4. Notify Architect and Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when joints will be

tested. 5. Arrange for tests to take place with component manufacturer's technical representatives present

if possible. Use a J-Roller to apply equal pressure on the flashing for best adhesion. Allow 24

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1

hours before testing adhesion. Follow primer adhesive and flashing manufacturer’s recommendations regarding application of Primer Adhesive and flashing, such as surface preparation, method of application, quantity applied, etc.

a. Test Method: Test joint adhesion according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

6. Inspect tested joints and report whether self-adhered flashing with primer adhesive failed to adhere to weather resistive barrier or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used in each test. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

7. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Joints not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use joint components that fail to adhere to substrates during testing.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with

damp surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood to provide air circulation within stacks.

B. Delivery of lumber that deviates from grade standards or is in any way defective and inappropriate to its intended use, such as wood with excessive moisture content, loose knots, decay, insect damage, splits and pitch pockets shall not be accepted and shall be immediately removed from the site.

C. Deliver pressure treated wood marked to comply with AWPB Quality Mark requirements. Deliver lumber stamped with grade, mark of mill identification, and trademark of association under whose rules the material is produced.

D. Handle treated wood according to processors’ suggested safety precautions, including the use of impervious gloves and dust masks.

1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Work Related to Other Trades:

1. Fit carpentry work to work of other trades. Provide furring, nailers, blocking and similar supports as required for proper attachment of the work of other trades. Coordinate with other trades for locations and kinds of blocking required.

2. Furnish lumber and set all wood frames, wood blocks, wood bucks, etc., required for masonry work.

3. Coordinate installation of wood trusses.

B. Protection: Provide temporary protections, as specified in this Section and elsewhere in these Specifications, including, but not limited to:

1. Temporary coverings at window and door openings while drywall and other finish work is in progress until windows and doors are installed. Arrange closures to permit ventilation. Provide hinged batten doors at exterior door openings. Maintain such protection in good repair until all glass and permanent doors and sash are in place.

2. Temporary railings and barriers around openings and edges of roof, etc. Also, protect around excavations.

3. Temporary sheeting and lumber for protection of doorways, floors and other finish work.

4. Temporary protection for bench marks. Maintain the integrity of permanent benchmarks throughout the Work.

C. Coordination: Other trades shall not be allowed to drill or otherwise alter framing so as to diminish its strength or integrity.

OEMA-2014-107 061000-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Lumber: Worked and graded in accordance with American Lumber Standard PS 20 (U.S. Dep. Comm.), S4S, seasoned to moisture content not exceeding 19% and stamped “S-DRY.”

1. Studs: Type and grade as indicated on Drawings. Use 2x6 size for exterior walls and 2x4 size for interior partitions except as noted otherwise.

2. Headers, Joists, Rough Frames, Framing Sills, etc.: Type and grade as indicate on Drawings.

3. Nailers at Membrane Roofing: Type and grade as indicated on Drawings.

B. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Wood veneers laminated with exterior type adhesive; design stresses as indicated on Drawings and as required to meet use intended.

C. Wood Furring and Grounds: Type and grade as indicated on Drawings.

D. Plywood (sheathing): Type, grade, glue and thickness as indicated on Drawings. Moisture content shall not exceed 18% at time of air infiltration barrier installation.

E. Oriented strand board (OSB): Compliance with standards; product rating, grade and thickness as indicated on Drawings. Moisture content shall not exceed 18% at time of air infiltration barrier installation.

F. Air Infiltration Barrier: “Tyvek CommercialWrap D”(for drainage system) by Dupont.

1. Self-Adhered Flexible Flashing: “Tyvek FlexWrap NF” conformable flashing tape for sealing penetrations and for flashing around openings.

2. Self-Adhered Flashing: “StraightFlash” flashing tape for:

a. Flashing around openings in flat plane application as recommended by manufacturer in written installation instructions.

b. Joint between air infiltration barrier and weather resistant barrier.

3. Provide manufacturer’s recommended joint tape for products used and intended application.

4. Adhesive/Primer: Include the following adhesive primer to enhance adhesion of Tyvek StraightFlash to building paper:

a. DuPont Adhesive/Primer.

G. Weather Resistive Barrier (at manufactured stone veneer and where noted): Contractors choice of one of the following:

1. #15 Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, conforming to ASTM D 226, Type I.

2. 60 Minute Grade D Paper, complying with Federal Specification UU-B-790a, Type I, Grade D, Style 2. Provide ‘Super Jumbo Tex 60 Minute’ as manufactured by Fortifiber Building Systems Group or approved comparable product.

H. Sill Sealer: 1/4" thick polyethylene foam gasket, width to match sill plate, equal to “Amofoam Sill Sealer” as manufactured by Amoco Foam Products Company.

I. Connector Brackets:

1. Joist Hangers: Size and profile to suit application; galvanized finish. 2. Plywood Sheathing Clips: Galvanized steel, Simpson Strong Tie, PSC Series, or equal. 3. Galvanizing: Hot dipped galvanized, ASTM A153 – Class D.

J. Nails, Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hardened steel; size and type best suited to conditions; galvanized at exterior locations, food service areas and treated nailers; cement-coated or plain finish ring-


shank or twist-shank for other interior locations; size and head to suit application. Drywall screws are not acceptable.

2. Fasteners for Interior Sills: Powder-actuated stud-pins of sufficient length to penetrate concrete floor slabs 1/2".

3. Galvanizing: Hot dipped galvanized, ASTM A153 – Class D.

2.02. WOOD TREATMENT

A. Comply with applicable requirements of American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB).

B. Wood Preservative Treatment: Waterborne Sodium Borate based type preservative complying with AWPA-U1.

1. Acceptable products include:

a. “Advance Guard” by Osmose b. “Sillbor” by Arch Wood Protection, Inc. c. “EnviroSafe Plus” by Wood Treatment Products, Inc.

2. Drying: After pressure treatment, kiln dry the treated wood:

a. Lumber to a maximum moisture content of 19%. b. Plywood to a maximum moisture content of 18%.

3. Field Treatment for Holes and Cuts: Waterborne Sodium Borate based type rate as recommended by manufacturer.

4. Grade Marking: Mark each treated item to comply with AWPB Quality Mark requirements.

5. Scope: Treat all wood members to a retention of 0.17 pcf.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Wood Framing: Comply with recommendations of NFPA “Manual for House Framing,” NFPA “Recommended Nailing Schedule,” and NFPA “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.” Place work accurately, level, plumb and true.

2. Plywood Installation: Comply with recommendations of APA “Design and Construction Guide - Residential and Commercial.”

3. Execute rough carpentry in a manner to achieve greatest stability.

4. Discard material with defects that might impair the strength or accuracy of the work, including wane, twist, bends and warp.

5. Do not shim sills, joists, short studs, trimmers, headers, lintels or other framing components.

B. Treated Wood: Brush apply 2 coats of the specified preservative treatment on cuts, holes and site-sawn ends. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.

1. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. The use of a sill sealer shall not remove the requirement for wood sill plates to be pressure treated.


c. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

d. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

e. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

C. Stud Framing:

1. Space the studs 16" o.c. except as indicated otherwise. Extend partition studs to the structure above.

2. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates of matching 2x material; except single top plate may be used for non-load bearing partitions. Joints in top plates shall be lapped at least 6"; do not join over wall openings.

3. At exterior walls, anchor the bottom plate with foundation bolts over sill sealer.

4. Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs.

5. Provide double studs at each jamb of door and window frames up to 4 ft wide; triple studs over 4 ft wide. Space jack studs over door and window frames at same spacing as partition studs.

D. Nailers and Blocking Within Walls and Partitions:

1. Provide wherever required for attachment of work of other trades. Cut and fit as required for true line and level of work to be attached.

2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Bolts and nuts shall be countersunk flush with surfaces.

E. Plywood or OSB Wall Sheathing:

1. Install as recommended by the APA’s “Guide to Plywood Sheathing for Floors, Walls, and Roofs” for the spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work, using hot-dip galvanized 6d rink shank or threaded nails 6" o.c. at panel edges and 12" o.c. at intermediate framing, unless otherwise noted on Drawings or required to satisfy design loads. Install wood-based sheathing to maintain 1/8" space between end and edge joints of sheets on walls.

2. Install panels with all edges over solid framing.

F. Plywood Roof Sheathing:

1. Install as recommended by the APA’s “Guide to Plywood Sheathing for Floors, Walls, and Roofs” for the spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work.

a. Nail the roof sheathing at the perimeter of roof with 10 penny nails at 6” o.c., unless otherwise noted on Drawings or otherwise required to meet design loads for roof system.

2. Before laying panels, verify that surface to be covered is an even plane and framing members are not twisted or bent. Add blocking as required and shim as required to provide a smooth, flat plane on which panels may be nailed.

3. Nail panels to framing with hot-dip galvanized 6d rink shank or threaded nails at 6" o.c. along edges and 12" o.c. elsewhere unless otherwise noted on Drawings or required to meet design loads for roof system. Drive nails tight to panel faces.

4. Edge joints perpendicular to the direction of framing shall be supported halfway between framing members with metal edge clips.

5. Install panels perpendicular to framing, with all edges supported on solid framing. Stagger joints and maintain a 1/8" gap between roof sheathing sheets.

G. Roof Nailers: Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the single-ply membrane roof, at the base of roof projections, around roof penetrations and as required otherwise.


3.02. INSTALLATION OF AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER A. Wrap the air infiltration barrier material over sheathing on exterior walls, providing a barrier to water

intrusion as well as a barrier to air passage.

1. Install air infiltration barrier in one layer on entire exterior surface of exterior wall sheathing.

B. Install air infiltration barrier wrapping in accordance with manufacturer’s latest printed instructions. Do not use building paper or bitumen impregnated felts.

C. Begin the installation at the bottom of walls. Lap the joints of the air infiltration barrier, higher course over lower course, and seal all joints with manufacturer’s approved tape.

D. Assure a thorough air seal at perimeters of windows, doors and other penetrations through the sheathing.

1. Before placing Tyvek over openings, cover edges of sheathing with “FlexWrap NF” strips without making joints at the corners of the opening.

2. Apply Tyvek over openings. Then make an “I” cut in the Tyvek and wrap it around the jambs and window sills. Tape over all cut edges.

3. Tack and staple the Tyvek as required to keep it in place until finish systems can be installed.

3.01. INSTALLATION OF WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Install two separate layers of weather resistive barrier material over air infiltration barrier on portion of exterior walls to receive manufactured stone veneer in accordance with weather resistive barrier manufacturer’s printed instructions and as indicated in manufactured stone veneer manufacturer’s printed installation guide.

B. Begin the installation at the bottom of walls. Alter size of bottom course to offset joints between layers. Apply horizontally with a minimum 2-inch overlap and a minimum 6-inch end lap; securely fasten to substrate with galvanized staples or galvanized roofing nails.

C. Create seal at air infiltration barrier and top of weather resistive barrier using one of two following systems; 1) adhesive/primer and self-adhered flashing or 2) self-adhered flashing, depending on results of preconstruction field adhesion testing. Use same materials, quantities and application methods (including J-Roller) as the passing preconstruction field adhesion test.

D. Assure a thorough seal at perimeters of windows, doors and other penetrations through the sheathing.

E. Cover sheathing with weather resistive barrier as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing at manufactured stone veneer with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise indicated.

END 061000.


DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES

SECTION 061753 - FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Factory fabricated wood roof trusses. 2. Temporary bridging between trusses. 3. Erection of wood trusses, including erection hardware.


1. Wood stud walls and roof sheathing ...................................................... Section 061000.


A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee (ALSC) Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory stamps shall be clearly visible on finished products.

B. Design Standards (most current edition):

1. American National Standards Institute / American Wood Council “ANSI/AWC NDS - National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction” and it’s “Supplement.”

2. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC) “TCM - Timber Construction Manual.”

3. American National Standards Institute / Truss Plate Institute “ANSI/TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction.”

C. Fabricator’s Qualifications: TPI member in good standing, participating in TPI Quality Control Test Criteria Program or equivalent program which inspects all phases of truss fabrication including lumber storage, fabrication equipment and fabrication processes.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Test Data: Submit reports of truss performance tests as may be applicable to the Work.

C. Shop Drawings: Include:

1. Truss framing elevations; species and grades of lumber used; design loading and allowable stress increase; force analysis of each member; pitch, span and spacing of trusses.

2. Nominal sizes and locations of connectors at joints; gauge thickness; bearing and anchorage details.

3. Permanent bracing and bridging.

4. Truss designer’s recommendations for erection and handling.

5. Seal of Structural Engineer registered in the State of Wisconsin along with copies of manufacturer’s design analyses.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753-1


A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in SBCA BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

B. Store trusses flat, off the ground with adequate support to prevent lateral bending. Protect from weather and provide air circulation around stacks and under covers.

C. Remove trusses that have been subjected to bending and other loads sufficient to weaken connections. Replace with new trusses except as approved otherwise by manufacturer and Owner.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Roof trusses shall be as manufactured by Alpine Engineered Products (div. of ITW Building Components Group), Cascade Mfg. Co., or equal.

2.02. MATERIALS

A. Lumber: WWPA, WCLB, SPIB or NLGA graded softwood lumber, S4S, S-Dry, complying with PS 20, stress rated as required for loads imposed.

B. Connection Plates: ASTM A 446, Grade A steel; minimum 20-gauge (.036" thick); G-60 galvanized per ASTM A 525 or AZ 50 aluminum-zinc alloy coated per ASTM A 792.

2.03. FABRICATION

A. Ensure that members are accurately cut to length, angle and true to line, ensuring tight joints.

B. Joints shall all be set with jigs for uniformity and accuracy.

C. All joints shall be sound, tight and securely fastened upon delivery to site.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. ERECTION

A. Comply with recommendations of American National Standards Institute / Truss Plate Institute ANSI/TPI 1 “National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction” manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Set and secure wood trusses level, plumb and in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other Sections.

C. Ensure that truss ends have sufficient bearing area.

D. Do not impose onto trusses any loads for which they were not designed.

E. Cutting and altering of members will not be permitted.

F. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold trusses in place until permanently secured.

G. Furnish and install truss manufacturer’s recommended permanent bridging.

END 061753.

OEMA-2014-107 061753-2 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITIES

SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Finish carpentry work of every character, including, but not necessarily limited to:

a. Standing and running trim in dining areas. b. Interior wood paneling for walls. c. Fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) panels. d. Plastic or cedar lumber boards for dumpster enclosure gate (choice). e. Furnish and install gate hardware. f. Solid surface finished window stools, vanity tops and shelves. g. Plastic laminate construction as noted on Drawings. h. Removal prior to and reinstallation after painting of hardware.

2. Installation of toilet accessories, both those provided as part of this contract and those provided by Owner.


1. Wood grounds and concealed wood blocking ........................................ Section 061000. 2. Vapor barrier on interior of exterior wall studs ...................................... Section 072100. 3. Wood veneer faced doors ....................................................................... Section 081416. 4. Plastic laminate-faced doors in aluminum frames (alternate) ................ Section 081513. 5. Installation of hardware on aluminum doors .......................................... Section 084113. 6. Furnishing and installation of finish hardware for doors ........................ Section 087100. 7. Standards for installing door hardware ................................................... Section 087100. 8. Finish painting and staining, except back-priming specified herein....... Section 099000.

C. Related Work By Others:

1. Owner will furnish and install all items of furniture and furnishings, including trash receptacles for trash cabinets in Men's and Women's Rooms.

2. Owner will furnish and install all metal storage shelving not furnished by food service contractor.


A. Quality Standards: Except as otherwise noted or specified, comply with “Custom Grade” provisions of Architectural Woodwork Institute’s (AWI) “Architectural Woodwork Standards,” current edition.

B. Measurements: Before proceeding with millwork to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and Shop Drawing details as required for accurate fit.

C. Workmen: Use only tradesmen experienced in the fabrication and installation of millwork.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 and with the State of Wisconsin Accessibility Code for attachment of toilet accessories.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-1

E. Adhesives, Sealants, and Sealant Primers: Comply with SCAQMD (South Coast Air Quality Management District) Rule 1168.

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Samples under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Samples: Upon request, submit Samples of each of the following items: 1. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: Three finished 8" square samples of each type and surface

finish, in colors selected. 2. Wood Paneling: Three finished 8" x 10" square samples of each type. 3. Solid Surface: Three 6 inch square samples with at least one edge showing edge profile to be

provided.

C. Shop Drawings for Solid Surface Materials: Submit fully dimensioned shop drawings showing vanity tops, window stools, shelves, etc. layouts, joinery, terminating conditions, substrate construction, cutouts and holes. Show plumbing installation provisions. Include elevations, section details, and large scale details.

D. Maintenance: Submit manufacturer’s cleaning and maintenance instructions for each finish material.


A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials until painting, wet work, sanding and grinding have been completed in installation areas and relative humidity in those rooms can be maintained between 25% and 55% until Final Acceptance.

C. Store materials in manner recommended by manufacturer to avoid staining, warping or other damage to materials.


A. Advise Contractor of the temperature and humidity required to be maintained in order to hold moisture content of finish carpentry within 1% of the optimum moisture content required until Final Acceptance.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. WOOD BASED MATERIALS

A. General: Interior woodwork shall be AWI Premium Grade, unless otherwise indicated, of an average moisture content within the range of 5% to 10%.

B. Interior Standing and Running Trim: Species as noted on drawings. Quarter sawn not allowed.

C. Wood Paneling: Prefinished type as noted on drawings. 1. Adhesive: C-375 Marlite Construction Adhesive or as recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Cedar Gate Boards: NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA, D and Better Clear western red cedar, surfaced four sides (S4S), maximum 19% moisture content.

2.02. PLASTIC MATERIALS

A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA type Ld3.

OEMA-2014-107 062000-2 FINISH CARPENTRY Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

1. Exposed Faces: .028" thick (+ .004") vertical-surface, high pressure type (GP28 Grade); in colors/patterns listed on drawings:

2. Edging: Plastic laminate, to match exposed faces. 3. Adhesive: Waterproof; use type recommended by laminate manufacturer. Products made with

urea-formaldehyde or melamine-formaldehyde must comply with HPMA Standard FTM 2 for emissions.

B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels: 0.090 thick fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels type as noted on drawings by Crane Composites, Inc. or approved equal.

1. Provide matching trim for joints, corners and exposed edges. 2. Adhesive: Manufacturer’s recommended adhesive based on substrate type.

C. Plastic Lumber Gate Boards (Recycled HDPE): “Bear Board” as manufactured by Engineered Plastic Systems, LLC (Ph: 800-480-2327) with color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s submitted color samples.

D. Solid Surface Material:

1. Cast, non-porous, filled, acrylic, not coated, laminated or of composite construction, meeting IAPMO Z124, Type Six, and FS WW-P-541E/GEN dated August 1, 1980 and the following:

a. Through body colors and patterns. b. Superficial damage to a depth of 1/32 inch shall be repairable by sanding or polishing. c. Material Color: As noted on Drawings. d. Material Thickness: As noted on Drawings but not less than 1/2 inch.

2. Joint Adhesive: Methacrylate-based adhesive for chemically bonding solid surfacing seams. Color complementary to solid surfacing sheet material. UL 2818 GREENGUARD Gold certified and complies with SCAQMD Rule 1168.

a. Product: “Wilsonart Hard Surface Adhesive.”

3. Siliconized Acrylic Sealant: Siliconized acrylic latex sealant. For general applications to fill gaps between countertops and at terminating substrates. Complies with ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF, and SCAQMD Rule 1168.

a. Product: “Wilsonart Color Matched Caulk”. b. Color: Complementary to solid surfacing color selected from sealant manufacturer’s

standard offerings.

4. Construction Adhesive: Countertop manufacturer’s recommended silicone-based construction adhesive for backsplashes, endsplashes, and other applications according to manufacturer’s published fabrication instructions.

5. Trash Grommet: Provide satin stainless steel finished #TM1B-SSS stainless steel trash grommet as manufactured by Doug Mockett and Company, Inc.

2.03. FASTENERS

A. Nails: Ring-shank or rough coated finish, size and type to suit application. Non-ferrous or hot dip galvanized for exterior.

B. Interlocking Mechanical Fasteners: Conforming to 400B-S-8.A or 1600B-S-4.A or to Sections 14 and 25 of the Woodwork Institute of California’s manual of millwork; corrosion resistant finish.

2.04. SHOP FABRICATION

A. General: Locate loose joints so as to render them as inconspicuous as possible in the finished work.


B. Solid Surfacing: Shop fabricate solid surface items in one piece with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Rout ends for ease of scribing in the field. 2. Rout holes and cutouts, shown on Drawings, and complete by sanding all edges smooth. 3. Where solid surface material has plywood backing, seal plywood backing with varnish at sink

and trash cutouts. Install stainless steel grommet in trash cutout.

C. Interior Standing and Running Trim:

1. The reverse side of trim members shall be routed out or grooved (backed out), except for members with ends exposed in the finished work.

2. Members shall be single lengths except as approved otherwise by Owner, and then shall be tight and so formed as to conceal shrinkage.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Ensure that mechanical and electrical items affecting millwork are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected and approved prior to commencement of installation.

B. Condition the wood items to the prevailing humidity conditions of the installation areas before installing.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. General: Secure work to grounds and blocking as required, holding to correct surfaces, lines and levels. Make finished work flat, plumb, and true. Install items tight to adjoining surfaces except as approved otherwise. Cope and scribe for tight fits.

1. Fastening: Conceal fastenings; where not possible, locate them in inconspicuous places. Where nailing is permitted through woodwork face, conceal nail heads. Do not nail adjacent woodwork to paneling.

2. Miter external corner of flat horizontal members; house internal corners. Miter external corners of molded members; cope internal corners. Glue mitered corners; secure with corrugated metal fasteners.

3. Thoroughly sand finished wood items smooth. Touch up edges and make smooth.

B. Millwork:

1. Install millwork in a manner consistent with the specified quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work.

2. Install running trim in maximum lengths; do not use short pieces or splicing of scraps. Bevel splices and join only where solid fastenings can be made. Make all joints tight. Offset joints between adjacent members.

3. Sink nail heads 1/16" deep in running trim, using nail set. Fill with putty stained so that it will blend in with surrounding surfaces after application of the specified varnishes. Countersink screw heads and cover with matching wood plug sanded flush.

C. Wood Paneling: Install as shown and noted on drawings.

1. Apply adhesive to back of panels at rate, using trowel of size, as recommended by paneling manufacturer. Adhere paneling to substrate and install manufacture’s clip to secure each panel to adjacent panels.

OEMA-2014-107 062000-4 FINISH CARPENTRY Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

D. Solid Surfacing:

1. Install solid surface material level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

2. Fasten vanities and shelves by screwing through support frames and brackets into underside of top. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Where joints cannot be avoided, align adjacent surfaces and, using seam adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

a. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

3. Scribe ends of window stools to window jamb with minimum 1/8 inch for expansion space at each jamb. Fill expansion space with specified sealant. Fix in place with sufficient waterproof construction adhesive to resist prying off with a 300-pound weight on the end of a 30" crow bar.

4. Completed work to be plumb, level and true with edges eased and sanded smooth.

3.03. INSTALLATION OF TOILET ACCESSORIES

A. Attach all toilet accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations shown. Secure each item in accordance with its manufacturer’s instructions for each type of substrate construction, except as specified otherwise.

1. Anchor only into solid wood blocking.

2. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.

B. Grab Bars: Install bars at proper dimensions above floor to comply with accessible facilities standards. Install all grab bars with a maximum nominal clearance of 1–1/2" between bar and wall. Attachment of grab bars shall support a minimum load of 250 pounds downward force.

3.04. ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Repair damaged or defective work.

B. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation.

C. Clean exposed interior and exterior surfaces according to surface manufacturer’s written instructions. Remove excess adhesives, sealants, and similar materials.

D. Clean plastic laminate with a damp cloth or ordinary bar-soap and water. Harsh abrasive cleansers must not be used. More stubborn dirt, greasy fingerprints or glue spills, may be removed with solvents such as lacquer thinner, methyl-ethyl-ketone (MEK) or contact adhesive solvents.

3.05. PROTECTION

A. Protect installed finish carpentry from damage by other trades until Owner’s acceptance of the work.

END 062000.


DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 072100 – BUILDING INSULATION

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Rigid perimeter foundation insulation. 2. Blanket and batt insulation for walls and partitions. 3. Rigid insulation for cooler and freezer floors. 4. Vapor barrier at exterior walls.


1. Backfilling over foundation insulation ..................................................... Section 312000. 2. Preparation of concrete to receive insulation ............................................ Section 033000. 3. Insulation for membrane roofing .............................................................. Section 075419. 4. Gypsum board to enclose vapor barrier .................................................... Section 092116.

1.02. SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s specifications for each type of insulation required.

1.03. DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow.

B. Insulation shall bear manufacturer’s label or stamp.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Rigid Perimeter Foundation Insulation: Closed cell extruded polystyrene foam board insulation 2" thick, complying with ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer’s standard sizes.

1. Minimum R-value, per 1" thickness at 40°F: 5.4. 2. Minimum compressive strength: 25 psi. 3. Maximum water absorption: 0.15% by volume.

B. Rigid Insulation for Cooler/Freezer Floors: Closed cell extruded polystyrene foam board insulation, each layer 2" thick, complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, in manufacturer’s standard sizes.

1. Minimum R-value, per 1" thickness at 40°F: 5.0. 2. Minimum compressive strength: 60 psi. 3. Maximum water absorption: 0.15% by volume.

C. Batt Insulation: Glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets complying with ASTM C 665.

1. Types: Unfaced, if furnished with separate polyethylene vapor barrier, or faced with aluminum foil.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin BUILDING INSULATION 072100-1

2. Thermal Insulation for Exterior Stud Walls: 5–1/2" thick, minimum R-value of 19, unless otherwise noted on Drawings.

3. Acoustical Insulation for Interior Partitions: Same kind as for exterior walls but 3-1/2" thick.

2.02. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Perimeter Insulation: Type recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

B. Vapor Barrier (when batts are not foil faced): Clear low-density polyethylene film at least 6 mils (.006") thick, having a vapor resistance no larger than 0.19 perms.

1. Vapor-Barrier Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-barrier manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor barrier.

2. Adhesive for Vapor Barriers: Product recommended by vapor-barrier manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor barriers securely to substrates indicated.

3. Vapor-Barrier Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION

A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Install a vapor barrier over interior face of exterior studs so as to provide a continuous vapor barrier (including connection to vapor barrier at roof deck) around the occupied spaces. Where insulation does not have a foil facing, apply a separate vapor barrier film.

B. Extend vapor barriers to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor barriers in place with adhesives, vapor barrier fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor barriers to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

C. Seal vertical joints in vapor barriers over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor-barrier tape according to vapor-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor barriers with vapor-barrier tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor barriers.

E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor barriers immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-barrier tape or another layer of vapor barrier material.

F. Exposure: Vapor barrier cannot remain exposed. Unless detailed to be covered by another material, all vapor barriers shall be covered by 5/8 inch thick gypsum wall board.

3.03. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. General: Extend insulation full thickness shown over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation.

B. Rigid Perimeter Foundation Insulation:

OEMA-2014-107 072100-2 BUILDING INSULATION Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

1. Apply insulation to the inside of exterior foundation walls, from under the floor slab down to the top of the footing.

2. Butt joints tightly. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Apply insulation with adhesive directly to concrete so as to hold it in place until backfilling is complete.

3. Replace insulation damaged by backfilling or any other operation, at no additional charge to Owner.

C. Insulation for Cooler/Freezer Floors:

1. Apply insulation in 2 courses, alternating joints at least 8" between courses.

2. Keep joints tight, including intersections with walls.

3. Carefully cut for penetrations, keeping insulation tight to penetrating pipes.

D. Blanket and Batt Insulation:

1. Provide batts of appropriate width to fit in stud spaces tightly. Batts shall extend full height of wall, leaving no voids.

2. Install acoustical insulation in interior partition stud spaces where indicated. Insulation shall extend full height of wall and fill all voids. Place insulation behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions and tight to items passing through partitions.

3. Penetrations at ducts or structural framing, cut insulation shall be stuffed all around with acoustical insulation.

4. Electrical penetrations and other wall penetrations shall be surrounded with acoustical insulation extending 12" around the opening.

5. Fill control joints with insulation.

END 072100.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin BUILDING INSULATION 072100-3


SECTION 072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. A weather-tight drainable type exterior insulating and finish system (EIFS) for wall surface, trim and accent featuring the following components:

a. Gypsum sheathing. b. Moisture drainage membrane. c. Insulation board base to receive finish coating system. d. Reinforcing mesh and edge trims. e. Synthetic, stucco-like finish. f. Control joint and perimeter joint sealant work.


1. Wood stud framing work, sheathing and air infiltration barrier .............. Section 061000. 2. Other building insulations ....................................................................... Section 072100. 3. Metal coping ........................................................................................... Section 076200. 4. Joint sealant standards............................................................................. Section 079200.


A. Qualifications:

1. System Manufacturer: Shall have marketed the exterior insulation and finish system in the United States for at least 5 years and have at least 1,000 completed projects.

2. Manufacturer’s Approval: EIFS applicator shall be approved in writing by system manufacturer.

B. Source of Supply: All materials used shall be products of the system manufacturer or shall be approved by the system manufacturer for the application applied.

C. Field Quality Control:

1. Manufacturer’s Inspection:

a. Regularly during the course of construction, work shall be inspected by system manufacturer’s authorized representative for conformance to manufacturer’s requirements.

b. System manufacturer’s representative shall have free access to all areas of EIFS work including staging, storage and mixing rooms.

2. Specifications and Instructions: System manufacturer’s specifications, including installation instructions, shall be available at the job site at all times.

3. State Code Evaluation Services’ Report: Report on the system shall be available at the job site at all times.

D. Approvals, Listing and Classifications:

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-1

1. Underwriters Laboratories: Insulation board, with finish system, shall be classified by UL as having a flame spread not more than 25 and smoke development index not more than 450 when tested per ASTM E 84.

2. Factory Mutual: Entire insulation and finish system shall be approved by FM and conform to the listing in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

3. System shall be a water drainable system listed as an approved product by State Code.

E. Tests: System shall have been tested for moisture resistance, absorption-freeze, accelerated weathering, mildew resistance, salt spray resistance, chemical resistance, and abrasion resistance.

1. Impact Resistance: System shall have passed full scale tests per EIMA 101. 2. Wind Load: System shall have passed full scale tests per ASTM E 330 respectively. 3. Fire: System shall have achieved the Modified ASTM E 108: Flame height less than 6 feet.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data describing all products to be used in the application.

1. Manufacturer’s Application Instructions: Where manufacturer provides options, indicate which option will be used for the work.

2. Color Charts: For all ancillary materials that will be exposed in finish work, submit charts with complete range of colors for selection by Architect and as noted on drawings, including joint sealant.

C. Samples:

1. EIFS: Based on custom color selections indicated on Drawings, submit 2 samples 12" x 12" of each finish, color and texture to be considered for installation, using same tools and techniques, as for actual Project. Include in each sample panel a typical routed groove “joint.”

2. Color and Texture: Adjust submittal and resubmit panels until approved.

D. Test Reports: Upon request, submit 3 copies of test reports performed on the EIFS.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit details showing jointing and fastenings. Show limits of finish coat at joints.

1.04. MOCKUP

A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.

1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Deliver all materials to installation site in original unopened and undamaged packaging with labels intact.

B. Labeling of Insulation Boards: Boards shall bear UL label, name of raw material used and name of molder.

C. Store all materials protected from sunlight and weather at temperatures not less than 40°F at all times.

OEMA-2014-107 072400-2 EXTERIOR INSULATION. & FINISH SYSTEM Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin


A. Ambient Air Temperature:

1. 40°F or greater and rising at the time of installation of the system coatings and shall remain at 40°F or greater for at least 24 hours after application.

2. Temperatures below 40°F: Supplemental heat, including heat-containing enclosures, shall be furnished when the ambient temperature falls below 40°F; and heat shall be maintained to keep applied materials above 40°F until they are properly cured.

B. Weather Damage: Schedule work to avoid damage from sunlight and wet weather, especially with respect to insulation boards and coating.

C. Scheduling: Schedule sufficient workers and equipment so that each area of work finished may be concluded free of cold joints, scaffolding line, etc.

D. Protection: The system, especially open joints, shall be protected from the intrusion of water at all times.

1.07. WARRANTY

A. Terms: System manufacturer shall provide an 8-year written warranty against defective materials.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MANUFACTURERS AND SYSTEMS

A. Acceptable manufacturer and product: Provide Standard Watermaster LCR EIFS Class PB Drainage System as manufactured by Parex USA, Inc.

B. The EIFS shall be applied in -place at the site on the substrates indicated.

2.02. MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Sheathing: “DensGlass Sheathing” by Georgia-Pacific, 1/2" thick, manufactured per ASTM C 1177, with glass mat on faces and long edges laminated to silicone treated gypsum core.

B. Drainage Membrane: As specified in Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry.”

C. Insulation Type: Grooved back polystyrene boards meeting EIMA guideline specifications and specifications of system manufacturer and having approval of EIFS manufacturer.

1. Fire Rating: Flame spread less than or equal to 25 and smoke development less than or equal to 450 when tested per ASTM E 84.

2. Size: Maximum 2'-0" x 4'-0".

3. Thickness: 2" and as otherwise shown. Special shapes shall be cut from whole blocks of dimensionally stabilized insulation except as otherwise allowed by system manufacturer.

D. Insulation Fasteners: Manufacturers standard, having thermal barrier cap over the head of the fastener. Include manufacturer’s anti-corrosion coated screws suitable for anchoring to wood studs.

E. Reinforcing Mesh: A balanced, open mesh made from glass fiber, treated to be alkali and moisture resistant and to bond with base coat material, as supplied by system manufacturer.

1. Typical reinforcement mesh, corner and reinforcement mesh, edge and light impact resistant reinforcing mesh: Manufacturer’s standard.

F. Base Coat: Noncementitious, 100% acrylic copolymer emulsion-based ground coat.


G. Finish Coat: An acrylic-based, factory-mixed coating manufactured by system manufacturer, having integral color and texture:

1. Texture: Sand fine finish. 2. Colors: As listed on drawings.

H. Aggregates for Finish Coat: Natural and/or machine made sands washed free of iron and chemical deposits and otherwise free of deleterious substances.

I. Water: Clear and potable.

J. Edge Beads:

1. Vent Strip: Metal edge drip extrusion incorporating a continuous perforated strip for ventilation.

K. Joint Sealant:

1. EIFS manufacturer’s recommended silicone or StPe based liquid sealant tested per EIMA Standard 300.01 and exhibiting 50% elongation after conditioning.

2. Provide sealant with guaranteed 20-year life; colors as selected by Architect from sealant manufacturer’s standard options.

3. Backer Rods: Include closed-cell polyethylene or extruded polyolefin foam backer rods having non-absorbing skin as well as bond breaker tape.

4. Backer Rod Sizes: Provide sizes that will form optimum shape of sealant at bottom of joint and will minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed.

5. Priming: Include sealant primers as required and recommended.

2.03. MIXING AND PREPARATION

A. Equipment: Use only equipment approved by system manufacturer.

B. Materials: Mix only such materials as are approved by manufacturer and only in quantities recommended by manufacturer. Use no accelerants, retarders, fillers or other additives.

C. Procedures: Carefully follow manufacturer’s recommended procedures for mixing.

D. Pot Life: Use materials immediately after being mixed.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION & PREPARATION

A. Substrate: Prior to installation of the EIFS, the substrate shall be examined for compliance with manufacturer’s requirements. Report any substandard conditions, to Architect for determination of how substrate shall be made compliant.

B. Soundness: The substrate shall be examined for soundness, such as tightness of connections, crumbling or looseness of surface, voids and projections, etc.

C. Dryness: The substrate shall be dry and show no evidence of retaining moisture.

D. Flatness: The substrate shall be flat with no offsets greater than 1/4 inch in any 4 ft. distance.


3.02. APPLICATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING

A. Apply a layer of 1/2” gypsum sheathing (DensGlass Sheathing) to the light gage metal framing using mechanical fastening methods recommended by the system manufacturer for the substrate shown.

3.03. APPLICATION OF DRAINAGE MEMBRANE

A. Refer to Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry” for the installation of the moisture drainage membrane.

3.04. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. General: Apply insulation boards to substrate with mechanical fasteners. Methods of installation shall be as recommended by the system manufacturer and approved by for the substrate indicated.

B. Joints: Apply insulation boards horizontally, with grooves vertical and vertical joints offset between courses by at least 6". Butt joints tightly. Interlock board joints at corners. Align drainage grooves in boards.

1. Remove edges of boards degraded by sunlight.

2. At penetrations, offset board joints at least 6" from edge of penetration.

3. Offset insulation boards with respect to substrate joints by at least 8", except at control joints and expansion joints which shall be aligned.

4. Assure that all joints are tight. Rout out poorly fit joints and fill gaps with tight fitting slivers taken from insulation boards or use approved foam-in-place seal to fill joints. Filling joints with non-foam products will not be allowed.

5. Cut insulation back at caulked joints so that AFTER installation of base coat and mesh, the joint width will be the dimension shown.

C. Ensure that edges are straight, plumb and true.

D. Shape backs of insulation boards as required to make way for any conduits, bracket mounts, etc. so as to allow insulation to lay tight to the substrate.

E. Drip Bottoms: Form a positive drip at bottom of panels where suspended in space, such as at window heads. Profiles other than those shown may be used provided that the panel sight lines remain as shown.

F. Decorative Reveal “Joints”: Cut out lines as indicated, maintaining an insulation thickness of at least 3/4". Use jigs and straightedges as required for correct placement, accurate and true lines.

G. Provision for Surface Mounted Items: Insert sleeves of 1/4" brass or galvanized tubing to pass anchor screws for attachment of downspouts and other mounted items and light fixtures.

H. Smoothing: Assure that the overall exposed surfaces are flat, with all edges aligned. Use straightedge at least 10 feet long to check offsets. Fill any dents greater than 1/8" across, using manufacturer’s recommended repair methods. Let filler dry and then sand high areas to produce flat surface.

1. Sanding Parallel to Joints: Not allowed. 2. Residue: Vacuum away all sanding residue. 3. Low Spots: Filling with base coat material or other compound NOT allowed.

3.05. INSTALLATION OF BASE COAT AND REINFORCING MESHES

A. Preparation: Before applying base coat:


1. Surface Defects: Sand off any damaged areas, such as insulation degraded by UV exposure. Feather the edges of sanded areas.

2. Priming: Prime the insulation board surface when so required by system manufacturer.

B. Initial Base Coat: Apply base coat material with a flat stainless steel trowel all across the insulation to a uniform coat approximately 1/16" thick, tightly bonded to the insulation and free of voids and thin spots.

C. Mesh: Apply mesh in continuous lengths over base coat while still fresh, to create a smooth, uniform base not greater than 3/32" thick.

1. Embedding: Using a stainless steel trowel, embed mesh in the fresh base coat material, ensuring that mesh is free of wrinkles and no mesh color is visible. Use additional base coat material as required.

2. Joints: Overlap edges of mesh at least 2-1/2". Do not lap joints within 8" of a corner or within 4" of a horizontal insulation joint.

3. Joint Laps: Feather out embedding material to at least 8" each side of the overlap.

4. Corners: Ensure complete coverage of mesh at corners of insulation.

5. Smoothness: Repair any areas that are not flat.

D. Strip Mesh: Apply strip mesh all along decorative joint lines, all along outside and inside corners.

3.06. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Extent: Apply sealants to joints between panels within the field of the system and around perimeters, to create a weathertight, leakproof construction.

B. Surface Conditions: Apply the sealants only to cured base coat material before the application of finish coats. Apply sealants only to base coatings that COMPLETELY encapsulate the insulation board as well as the reinforcing mesh.

C. Joint Sizes: Apply sealants only to joints of the required sizes.

D. Backing: Do not allow sealant to adhere to bottom or back of joint; use backer rod and bond breaker tape accordingly.

E. Workmanship: Conform to standards of Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

3.07. INSTALLATION OF FINISH

A. Inspection and Preparation: After base coat material is dry to manufacturer’s specifications, inspect surface for flatness, protruding fibers, damage and deterioration due to weathering. Repair as required to create even surfaces.

B. Prime Coat: Prime for the base coat surface as required by system manufacturer, using primer colored to match finish coat.

C. Sealed Joints: Where sealants are to be applied, mask off the portions of base coat that are to be bonded to the sealants. Do not apply finish over joint faces to be caulked.

D. Finish Coat Application: Apply tight to base coat with a clean stainless steel trowel, always working to a wet edge, using sufficient workers and equipment to prevent cold joints, scaffolding lines, etc. Terminate finish coat application only at a joint.

E. Finish Coat Texture: Texture the finish throughout the applications to match the approved sample.


3.08. PROTECTION OF FINISH

A. Protect finish coat from the weather until fully cured. Protect from rain and excessive sun with plastic sheeting.

B. Anchor the protective sheeting in manner to avoid damage to completed work. Any damage to completed work shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect without additional cost to Owner.

3.09. CLEANUP

A. Clean adjacent materials and surfaces of spatter stemming from these operations.

B. Remove left over materials and equipment from the site.

END 072400.



SECTION 075419 - PVC ROOFING SYSTEM

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Fully adhered, single ply sheet roofing system. 2. Mechanically fastened board and tapered roof insulation. 3. Vapor Barrier. 4. Elastomeric membrane roof flashings, including base flashings and parapet flashings. 5. Elastomeric flashing boots at pipe penetrations.


1. Plywood roof sheathing & treated wood blocking ........................................ Section 061000. 2. Sheet metal coping and related flashings ...................................................... Section 076200. 3. Sealants for general construction ................................................................... Section 079200. 4. Prefabricated curbs for rooftop mechanical equipment ................................. Div. 15 Sections.


A. Roofing Contractor's Qualifications:

1. The Duro-Last Roofing System must be installed by an authorized Duro-Last contractor.

2. Wisconsin licensed (if applicable), specializing for at least 5 years in the kind of membrane system involved, who is certified/licensed by roofing membrane system producer and who can furnish for this installation a fulltime foreman, factory trained by the roof membrane system producer.

B. Source of Supply: Roofing system materials shall be obtained from a single source of supply except as authorized otherwise by membrane producer.

C. Pre-Construction Conference: Roofing Installer shall meet with Owner’s representative and roof membrane producer’s representative before construction begins to establish the techniques and methods required to complete the roofing work as well as the criteria to be used during inspections.

D. Scheduling and Coordination:

1. Coordinate roofing installation with mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations.

2. No phased construction will be considered or approved.

E. Manufacturer’s Inspection: Membrane manufacturer’s representative shall inspect roofing during its installation; and, upon completion, he shall do final inspection in company with Owner’s authorized representative. Contractor shall make all arrangements for inspections.

1. Installation of insulation. 2. Adhering of membrane. 3. Construction of seams and base flashings. 4. Other critical points of construction as deemed necessary at the pre-construction conference.

F. No wet or damaged materials shall be installed.

1.03. SUBMITTALS

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-1


B. Product Data: Submit 3 copies of roofing materials producer’s specifications, material characteristics and installation instructions for each product required, including fasteners.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate:

1. Outline of roof and dimensions.

2. Typical and special details for flashings, roof curbs, penetrations, roof drains, perimeter conditions, termination details, etc. Reference the locations of details on roof outline.

3. Number and mark of each factory prepared roofing sheet and flashing.

4. Fastener patterns for insulation at field, perimeter and corner conditions, as well as membrane edges, as required to meet design requirements for wind uplift resistance.

5. Layout of tapered insulation.

D. Certificates:

1. Submit copy of membrane producer’s approval of Installer.

2. Submit membrane producer’s letter, signed by an officer of the company, affirming that all construction documents have been reviewed, the materials proposed for use comply with the requirements of the construction documents and are acceptable to the company for issue of the warranties specified.

3. Submit certification that the roof system is installed which conforms to a wind uplift resistance of 90 mph and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek (WH) as Class A according to external fire tests conducted per ASTM E 108.

4. Submit list of foremen who have received factory training for installation of the system to be installed, along with kinds and dates of training.

E. Test Strip Results:

1. Submit on a copy of the Shop Drawing plans marked to show where each test strip was cut to verify the integrity of welded seams.

2. Upon Owner’s request, submit the test strips taken, each identified for location and date taken.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All membrane assembly components shall bear FMRC-Approved marking.

B. Deliver materials to job site in their original containers or packages, sealed, with legible labels intact, brand name, lot number, warning labels and reference standards clearly shown.

C. Store materials in the dry and in accordance with membrane producer’s instructions. Other than roof membrane, all materials furnished shall be stored between 60°F and 80°F. If exposed to lower temperatures, restore to 60 - 80°F prior to use.

D. No wet or damaged materials shall be used in the application.

E. Maintain at least two 10-lb ABC fire extinguishers near area where work is being performed and train applicators in their proper use.

F. Any warped or broken insulation boards shall be removed from the site.

1.05. WARRANTIES

A. Roofing shall be provided with a non-prorated, No-Dollar-Limit, full system warranty to the Owner, including insulation, against leaks or defects of any kind due to faulty materials or workmanship as follows:

1. Roofing membrane system producer’s 15-year warranty for materials and workmanship.

OEMA-2014-107 075419-2 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

2. Roofing Contractor’s 5-year warranty for workmanship.

B. Membrane system manufacturer shall issue to the Owner its applicable warranty for watertightness per current guidelines upon its receipt of certification from installer that the roof membrane system was installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System Fire Rating: Provide a fire-resistant membrane and insulation assembly which has been tested and listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) as Class A and which conforms to a wind uplift resistance of 90 mph for the roof decks and slopes to be used on this project.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. General: All roofing system components shall be provided by or approved by membrane manufacturer for use in roofing system and meeting the requirements of manufacturer for specified warranty.

B. Membrane Type and Manufacturer: Fully adhered scrim reinforced, polyvinyl chloride polymer blend (PVC) membrane, ASTM 4434 classified as Type III membrane, with a weft inserted polyester, not less than .060" thick, Duro-Fleece (DF60) and Duro-Fleece Colors (DFC 60) as manufactured by Duro-Last, Inc. Colors shall be as follows or as otherwise noted on drawings:

1. Vertical surfaces of potentially visual surfaces such as entrance and drive-thru canopies: Tan

2. Main Roof: White

B. Base and Parapet Flashing: Same material as used for roof membrane.

C. Pipe Flashings: Premolded boots of synthetic material approved by system producer for the membrane system, complete with stainless steel, screw tightened, pipe clamps.

D. Walkway Pads: Roofing system producer’s standard walkway pads or double layer of surplus roof membrane material.

E. Roof Insulation: Rigid, tapered boards with polyisocyanurate core and glass fiber reinforced mat facers facers both sides; minimum aged R of 5.5 per 1" of thickness. Comply with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, with minimum compressive strength of 20 psi (Grade 2).

1. Use manufacturer’s product acceptable to membrane manufacturer which has a Class A rating:

2. Thickness: 1–1/2" to 2-1/2" for flat boards. No board shall be less than 3/4" thick.

F. Mechanical Anchors: Types recommended by roof system manufacturer, including compression plates, for plywood substrate. Anchors shall feature anti-corrosive materials.

1. Anti-Corrosion Coating: Zinc-free, hard epoxy, fluoropolymer or other coating meeting or exceeding FMRC 4470 requirements.

2. Lengths: Selected to penetrate wood at least 1".

3. For Termination Bars: Furnish fasteners with neoprene washers.

G. Vapor Barrier: Polyethylene film, ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm.

1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Global approved for vapor-retarder application.


H. Auxiliary Materials: Prefabricated flashing units, bonding adhesives, sealants, splicing cements, mastics and other accessory materials shall be as recommended by producer of roof membrane for the system installed.

I. Flashing to Cover Corners in Substrates: Roof membrane manufacturer’s reinforced plastic sheet flashing strips, .035" (35 mil) minimum thickness.

J. Termination Bar:

1. One piece, surface mounted, .125" thick, mill finished, extruded 6063-T6 alloy aluminum, with angled lip on top creating a sealant ledge, equal to IB Aluminum Lip Termination Bar by IB Roof Systems, or approved equal. Unit shall be FM approved. Furnish aluminum in lengths not more than 4 feet long.

2. All exposed fasteners shall be installed with neoprene washers.

3. EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces upon which roofing system is to be applied so that they will be clean, dry, and free of fins, sharp edges, loose, damaged and foreign materials, oil and grease.

B. All surface voids in deck greater than 1/2" wide shall be filled flush with membrane producer’s recommended pourable sealer.

C. Inspect underside of roof deck for conduits and pipes that might intersect new roofing fasteners. Clearly identify on topside of roof where such intersections might occur.

D. Clean and maintain roof drains during new roofing installation to prevent back-up of water.

3.02 INSPECTION

A. Verify that surfaces to receive roofing system are suitable for application of the materials and that wood nailers have been properly installed. Notify General Contractor in writing of any unsuitable surfaces. Proceeding with roof system application shall designate acceptance of conditions.

B. Sweep roof surface clean of loose matter.

3.03 VAPOR RETARDER / BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Continuously seal side and end laps with adhesive/tape.

3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. General: Lay insulation boards over entire surface to receive membrane roofing, with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 6" between rows and between layers. Do not allow difference in elevation between units at joints to exceed 1/16".

1. Fill voids tight with slivers of insulation. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions.

2. Where Drawings do not show crickets or saddles that are needed to maintain a positive flow to drains of at least 1/8" per foot of finished slope after roof deflection under full design load, install additional tapered insulation to assure the required flow. Take special care to correct flow patterns at rooftop equipment.

3. Drive the screws perpendicular to the structural deck (not to the face of the insulation).

4. No more insulation shall be placed than can be covered with roofing membrane before the end of the day’s work or before the onset of inclement weather.


5. Adhesives shall be applied only to clean, dry surfaces.

B. Mechanically fasten the insulation using FMRC-approved spacing, usually a minimum of 1 approved fastener for every 4 square feet of roof insulation board.

3.05 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install roofing membrane and flashings, with adhesive, sealants, splicing cements, mastics, fasteners and other accessory materials as recommended by producer of roof membrane, in accordance with details, specifications and best practices recommended by membrane producer.

2. Follow all recommendations and comply with all precautions specified by roofing producer except that where conflict occurs between producer’s recommendations and these specifications, the more stringent requirement shall prevail.

3. Application techniques may vary as long as the requirements described within this specification are met:

a. Position the prefabricated roof section over the area to be covered. b. Fold the roof section back onto itself to expose half of the roof area to be covered by

that section. c. Apply adhesive in front of the fold along its length. Be careful not to apply more of the

adhesive than can be covered prior to the adhesive setting up. Start with moderate amounts of adhesive and adjust the amount as you get a feel for how fast the adhesive is setting up.

d. Lift the top layer of membrane and, starting at the fold, use a stiff squeegee or broom to push the membrane into the adhesive. Care must be used to avoid wrinkles and air pockets. Apply the membrane to cover the adhesive that has been applied and then repeat steps “c” and “d” until the first half of the roof section is completed.

e. Repeat steps “c” and “d” for the second half of the roof section. f. As each new roof section is added, overlap the adjacent sheets a minimum of 3 to 6

inch. g. Do not contaminate the membrane where seams are to be welded together. h. Do not thin adhesives.

4. Hot Air Welding: a. Position the membrane to allow an overlap of the top membrane onto the bottom

membrane, a minimum of 3 to 6 inches. Ensure the welding area is clean and free of foreign debris.

b. Weld the top membrane to the bottom membrane using a hand-held welder or an automatic welding machine and silicone roller. A minimum 1½ inch wide continuous weld is required.

c. All field weld seams should be inspected with a tack claw and all deficiencies repaired.

3.06 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Flashing:

1. The previous sections, which outlined acceptable products and proper substrate preparation, also apply to the walls.

2. The membrane is to adhered as follows:

a. Walls:


1) Adhesive must be applied to both the wall/substrate and to the membrane. The minimum coverage is 90 square feet per gallon between both surfaces. The actual coverage may vary depending upon the type of substrate and atmospheric conditions.

2) Do not adhere the same sheet of membrane that is covering the roof deck to a wall. Instead, use a separate sheet, with fastening tabs and mechanically fasten through one of the sheets at the roof-to-wall transition.

3) Provide mechanical fasteners and attachment spacing as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

4) A row of mechanical fasteners is required at all transitions on the wall except at the top if the membrane will extend to the outside face of the wall. These rows of fasteners can be installed through fastening tabs on prefabricated sheets.

b. Roof Penetrations:

1) Mechanical fastening is required at all roof penetrations. These include, but are not limited to, pipes, drains, curbs and expansion joints.

2) Refer to manufacturer’s detail drawings for proper termination at roof penetrations.

c. Walkway Pad: Install membrane manufacturer’s recommended walkway pad in accordance with detail drawings.

B. Counterflashings, metal edges, and other perimeter or penetration sheet metal work shall be properly fastened and sealed to maintain a watertight condition.

C. Temporary Closures: Install as needed to prevent water from flowing beneath the roof system during breaks in installation such as due to inclement weather. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for materials and methods.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Maintain roof membrane system manufacturer’s workmanship quality control program throughout the installation.

3.08 CLEAN UP

A. Clean smears and droppings from all non-roofing surfaces.

B. Remove roof construction rubble, debris, and excess roofing materials and containers.

END 075419.



SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL WORK

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Metal coping. 2. Metal canopy fascia. 3. Metal soffits. 4. Overflow scupper. 5. Miscellaneous break metal shapes as detailed. 6. Metal flashings and counterflashings as detailed. 7. Sealants required to make systems leakproof.


1. Wood framing ........................................................................................ Section 061000. 2. PVC roofing system ............................................................................... Section 075419. 3. Sealants for general construction ............................................................ Section 079200. 4. Painting of canopy anchorages ............................................................... Section 099000.


A. Details Not Shown On Construction Documents: Shall comply with applicable recommendations and details of the manufacturer, “Construction Details” by NRCA and “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” by SMACNA.

B. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.

1.03. MOCKUP


1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals per provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Samples: Submit 2 complete sets of each proposed color and finish, using the specified finish on the same metal as will be used for the metal coping. Final approval of color and finish will be made by Culver's corporate offices.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Shop Drawings specific to the project. Scales shall be sufficiently large to show all components clearly.

1. Show details, flashings, roof curbs, sealants, gauges, finishes and interfaces with surrounding materials.

D. Submit manufacturer’s written guarantee at completion of work.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin SHEET METAL WORK 076200-1

1.05. WARRANTY

A. Provide panel manufacturers' standard 20-year warranty against defects in product workmanship and materials, including chalking, fading, visible checking, crazing or peeling of factory-applied metal finish.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Base Material:

1. Metal Coping:

a. Base Material: Una-Clad, 24-gauge galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 361 or ASTM A 446, with G90 zinc coating, auto corrective leveled, with manufacturer’s standard embossed texture.

b. Length: 10 ft lengths.

c. Accessories: Held in place by continuous 22-gauge cleats nailed to wood blocking. Joints shall be backed with concealed splice plates at least 8" wide, fabricated with end dams and having gaskets to prevent water migrating from the joint area. Corners shall be mitered and seamed. Support the center of coping lengths to resist mechanical damage.

d. Factory applied fluoropolymer coating containing a minimum of 70% resin, by weight, Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin; color noted on drawings or if not noted, as selected by Architect.

2. Canopy Fascia Panels and Break Metal to match Canopy Fascia: 0.024" thick prefinished aluminum, natural anodized brushed finish, AA-C22A41, Class 1 (min. 0.7 mils thickness and sealed), natural aluminum color.

3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface, 2B (bright, cold rolled) finish, 26 gauge.

4. Soffit: Factory formed aluminum panels, 12" wide with “V” jointed, tongue and groove connections and required trim. Panels shall be vented. Finish shall be a factory applied baked enamel in manufacturer’s standard color selected by Architect. Panels shall be “System 3” Panels as manufactured by Rollex Corporation or approved equal.

5. Overflow Scuppers and Factory Painted Break Metal:

a. Una-Clad, 26-gauge factory finished galvanized steel as detailed on drawings.

b. Factory applied fluoropolymer coating containing a minimum of 70%, by weight, Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin; color noted on drawings or if not noted, as selected by Architect.

B. Fasteners: Ring-shank or screw-shank hot-dip galvanized nails or carbon steel screws coated with anti-corrosion coating, sized as required to meet UL 90 strength requirements.

1. For Fastening Aluminum: Aluminum or stainless steel nails with annular threads, of sufficient length to penetrate wood blocking at least 7/8".

2. Anti-Corrosion Coating: Zinc free, hard epoxy, fluoropolymer or other coating meeting or exceeding FMRC 4470 requirements.

3. Canopy Anchorage:

a. 1/2” dia. galvanized steel eye bolts with washers.

OEMA-2014-107 076200-2 SHEET METAL WORK Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

b. 3/8” dia. galvanized steel threaded rods with galvanized steel turnbuckles and required connectors.

c. Color: Field painted under Section 099000 “Painting.”

2.02. ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish fasteners, brackets, anchoring devices, spacers, flashings, closures, adhesives, joint sealers, expansion joints and other components needed for a complete, permanently weatherproof installation. Use materials that are non-corrosive, non-deteriorating, and compatible with panel faces.

B. Metal Fascia And Trim Sealants:

1. Tapes: Butyl based, not less than 3/4" wide where penetrated by screws.

2. Liquid Sealants: High modulus, non-corrosive sealants bearing sealant manufacturer’s 20-year guarantee.

3. Foam-In-Place Sealants: NOT allowed except to form back-up for liquid sealants and to fill voids at roof penetrations to inhibit thermal leakage.

2.03. FABRICATION

A. Fascias shall be fabricated from either pre-finished coiled stock in the factory or in the field or from sheet stock formed and finished in the factory.

B. Form and fabricate fascia and trim to the profiles shown and as required for permanent leakproof construction.

C. Form and fabricate fascia and trim to the profiles shown and as required for permanent leakproof construction.

1. Shop-fabricate the materials to the greatest extent possible.

2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

3. Provide concealed, noiseless means to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction, located so as to minimize the possibility of leakage.

4. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal.

5. Except as otherwise shown, fold back the sheet metal to form an open (non-compressed) hem on the concealed side of exposed edges.

6. Except as approved otherwise, fabricate joints so that fasteners will be concealed from the weather. Fabricate items so that fasteners pass only through predrilled holes.

a. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

7. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

8. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

a. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin SHEET METAL WORK 076200-3

9. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer.

10. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. PREPARATION

A. The installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which sheet metal work will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Coordinate sheet metal work with adjoining work to provide a permanently leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation.

C. Remove any strippable plastic protection before beginning installation.

3.02. SHEET METAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight installation.

B. Attachment to solid sheathing with concealed appropriate fasteners.

C. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb.

3.03. DAMAGED MATERIALS

A. Repair or replace any sheet metal work that has been damaged as directed by Architect.

B. Minor damage to finish may be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect.

END 076200.

OEMA-2014-107 076200-4 SHEET METAL WORK Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin


SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Sealant work for all exterior and interior joints, except as required to be completed under other Sections of the Specifications.

2. Standards for the sealant work specified in other Sections of the Specifications.


1. Exterior Insulation & Finish System (EIFS) .......................................... Section 072400. 2. Sealant at roof membrane assembly edges ............................................. Section 075419. 3. Sealant within joints of sheet metal work ............................................... Section 076200. 4. Sealing aluminum entrance system ........................................................ Section 084113. 5. Glazing sealants ...................................................................................... Section 088000. 6. Acoustical sealants ................................................................................. Section 092116. 7. Caulking touchup by painters ................................................................. Section 099000.


A. Compatibility: Before purchasing any sealant specified, investigate its compatibility with the joint surfaces and other materials in the joint system. Provide only materials that are known to be fully compatible with the actual installation condition, as affirmed by manufacturer’s published data or certification.

B. Deliver materials to job site in sealed containers with manufacturer’s original label attached, one brand for each type of sealant.

C. Applicators: Sealants shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions by skilled applicators trained in accordance with the Sealant, Water-proofing, and Restoration Institute’s (SWRI) “Applicator Training Manual.” Submit certificates of SWRI approved training for applicators, upon request.

D. Scheduling: Apply sealants before paints are applied.

1.03. MOCKUP


1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit 4 copies of manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant and associated miscellaneous material required.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin JOINT SEALANTS 079200-1

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Sealant for General Use and for Thresholds: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, M, A, O. Silicone base, single component, neutral curing; Shore A hardness between 15 and 50; non-staining; non-bleeding. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Pecora “890FTS-TXTR” 2. G.E. (Momentive) “SCS9000 Silpruf NB” 3. Dow Corning “756 SMS Building Sealant”

B. Sealant for Joints in Floors: Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T, non-staining, non-bleeding. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1. 2. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 950. 3. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201. 4. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 952. 5. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7101. 6. Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL. 7. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45.

C. Sealants Around Food Preparation and Other Interior Wet Areas: Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. 2. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. 3. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. 4. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

D. Sealant Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s extended line of colors.

E. Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of closed-cell polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, extruded polyolefin foam with non-absorptive skin, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

1. Provide size of rod that will form optimum shape of sealant at bottom of joint and will minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed.

2. Use adhesive backed 1/4" quarter round backer rod for all fillet joints, including fillet joints around exterior side of windows.

F. Joint Cleaners: Type recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be sealed.

G. Joint Primer/Sealer: Type recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces involved.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION

A. Examine all surfaces prior to application for suitability to receive sealant work.

B. Notify the General Contractor of any conditions detrimental to a satisfactory application that cannot be corrected by ordinary cleaning and priming.

OEMA-2014-107 079200-2 JOINT SEALANTS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456801361&mf=04&src=wd











3.02. PREPARATION

A. Clean joint surfaces free of dirt, oil, grease, moisture, loose mortar and/or other foreign matter immediately before installation of sealant.

B. Metal surfaces shall be wiped with joint cleaner using “two cloth” method and then dried.

C. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with a stiff bristle or fiber brush and blown or brushed clean.

D. Test each proposed combination of sealant and substrate to determine whether or not a primer is required to achieve the sealant manufacturer's advertised bond strength.

E. When applying primers or sealants that may bleed or stain, mask adjacent surfaces.

3.03. APPLICATION

A. Comply with sealant manufacturer’s printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Do not apply to damp surfaces.

B. Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Install sealant backer rod except where shown to be omitted. Install backer rod with approved tool designed to achieve the following uniform depths of sealant (at the thinnest point), unless recommended otherwise by sealant manufacturer:

1. Sealant in joints 1/4" wide shall be approximately but not less than 1/8" thick.

2. Sealant in joints 3/8" to 1/2" wide shall be not less than 3/16" thick but no thicker than half the width of the joint.

3. Sealant in joints larger than 1/2" wide shall be not less than 1/4" thick but no thicker than half the width of the joint.

D. Employ only proven application techniques which will ensure that sealant will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete “wetting” of the joint bonding surfaces, solid to the backing material.

1. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.

2. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

E. All joints shall be tooled immediately after application and left free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. Use dry tooling techniques unless sealant manufacturer recommends otherwise.

3.04. APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Provide sealant at both sides of all openings in exterior walls including but not limited to joints around perimeters of exterior window frames, aluminum entrance framing, door frames, louvers and other penetrations.

B. Exterior thresholds shall receive two continuous beads of sealant, one near each of the interior and exterior edges of the threshold.

C. Provide sealant at other joints including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Joints at base of hollow metal door frames. Sealant shall be installed prior to the installation of floor coverings.

2. Control joints in wall constructions.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3

3. Cross-joints in all copings, fascias and metal flashings when not sealed within the joint or provided with a sufficient overlap (min. 4" for an 8" face exposure).

4. Joints around penetrations through interior partitions and walls.

5. Joints where edges of gypsum board abut irregular surfaces.

6. Joints where countertops, cabinetwork, or other built-in work intersect irregular surfaces.

7. Control joints in quarry tile and paver tile floors.

8. Joints between ceramic wall tile and adjacent construction.

3.05. CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Remove all excess material and smears adjacent to joints as work progresses.

B. Protect finished sealant installation until cured.

C. Cutout and remove contaminated sealants, and replace with fresh sealant.

END 079200.

OEMA-2014-107 079200-4 JOINT SEALANTS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL WORK

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Flush steel door for exterior service door. 2. Non-rated hollow metal frames for steel and doors. 3. Non-rated hollow metal frames for wood doors (unless plastic laminated-faced door in

aluminum frames alternate is taken). 4. Silencers.


1. Sealants at hollow metal frame............................................................... Section 079200. 2. Wood doors ............................................................................................ Section 081416. 3. Furnishing and installation of door hardware, including thresholds ...... Section 087100. 4. Glazing .................................................................................................. Section 088000. 5. Finish painting ........................................................................................ Section 099000.


A. Provide standard hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm and in compliance with the recommended specifications of the National Associations of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) and the Steel Door Institute (SDI), except as may be specified otherwise herein.

B. Performance Standard: Door manufactured under this Section shall be capable of passing the following ANSI A250.4 tests when conducted on a specimen 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4":

1. Cycle Test: Level A (1,000,000 cycles).

2. Twist Test: 1-1/4” at 300 lbs pressure.

C. Supplier’s Qualifications: An established door distribution firm certified in writing by the hollow metal manufacturer as one of their approved suppliers, with at least 3 years’ successful experience in the supplying and installation of hollow metal work of the type specified.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Frames: Include configurations, anchor types and spacings, location of cutouts for hardware, sizes of reinforcements, shop finishes and finished sizes.

C. Door: Include elevations and locations of internal reinforcements, core construction, cut outs for glazing, shop finishes and edge closure methods.

D. Submit manufacturer’s letter verifying that the subcontractor supplying the hollow metal work is a certified agent of the manufacturer.

E. Submit manufacturer’s letter certifying galvanizing weights furnished. Include with the letter a description of the treatment given to galvanizing in preparation for painting.


A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job site storage.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin HOLLOW METAL WORK 081113-1

B. Deliver frame with temporarily attached steel angle shipping bar (“spreader bar”), or other means, to assure that frame arrives free of wracking and distortion.

C. Upon arrival at site, open wrappings to permit ventilation and inspect door and frame for scratches and abrasions. Immediately touch up exposed metal with primer of the type applied at factory.

D. Store doors and frames at the building site off floor, under cover. Place units on at least 4" high wood sills in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to requirements herein, hollow metal work shall be as manufactured by one of the following:

1. Ceco Door, Assa Abloy 2. Curries Company, Assa Abloy 3. Philipp Manufacturing Company 4. Steelcraft, an Allegion Brand 5. Security Metal Products Corporation

2.02. MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated commercial quality carbon steel sheets, complying with ASTM A 653 CS, Type B, coating designation G60 or A60.

B. Primer Paint: Capable of passing ANSI 224.1 test criteria after curing.

C. Hardware Reinforcements: High grade galvanized steel plates.

2.03. DOOR

A. Construction: ANSI A250.8, Level 3 (extra heavy duty), Model 2 (seamless), flush, 1-3/4" thick, fully insulated, free of warp. Hinge and lock edge seams shall be mechanically interlocked, welded and filled, and ground/finished smooth.

1. “Oil canning,” buckles and other imperfections not allowed. 2. Grind and dress exposed welds smooth.

B. Face Sheets: 16-gauge pre-galvanized sheet steel.

C. Core Reinforcement: Continuous vertical steel hat sections of not less than 22-gauge steel, placed back to back, filling space between face sheets, and spot welded to face sheets.

D. Insulation: Manufacturer’s standard sound retarding, fire-resistant, urethane, isocyanurate, glass fiber or mineral fiber sections sized to fill door voids.

E. Door Size: Fabricate with minimum clearances necessary for operation without binding:

1. 3/32" (3/16" max.) at jambs and head.

2. 1/8" (3/8" max.) at threshold.

F. Top of Door: Closed and made flush with an inverted channel of galvanized sheet steel fit into the recess at the door top and sealed; plastic closures not allowed.

G. Bottoms of Door: Provide weep holes in bottom channel.

H. Openings (for 1 inch insulated glass): At vision openings provide 12-gauge channel frames inside the door assembly, welded to both faces.

OEMA-2014-107 081113-2 HOLLOW METAL WORK Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

3. Removable Glazing Stops: Rolled steel shapes formed from 20-gauge pre-galvanized steel, with tight butted corners; formed to finish flush or slightly raised from door face. Prepare for countersunk screws at minimum of 12" o.c. Install so glazing frame is not removable from the exterior of the door. SlimTrim glazing trim for 1 inch thick insulating glazing by Ceco Door or similar product by other approved manufacturers.

4. Furnish flathead zinc, zinc-dichromate or cadmium plated screws for attachment.

2.04. FRAMES

A. Construction: Shop-welded, formed from 14-gauge pre-galvanized steel sheets. Faces, returns and rabbets at corners shall be continuously saw-mitered and welded.

B. All exposed welds shall be continuous, filling the joint, and ground smooth.

C. Floor Anchors: Steel clip-angle of same width and gage as frame with legs welded to back of frame, or adjustable type. Provide 2 widely spaced 1/4" holes for anchorage to floor.

D. Wall Anchors: Welded on 18-gauge steel “Z” angle clips full width of frame, with tab pressed against back of each frame face.

E. Frame Anchor Placement: Provide 3 wall anchors and 1 floor anchor per jamb. Locate bottom wall anchor just above hinge height and upper wall anchors just below hinge heights.

2.05. HARDWARE PREPARATION

A. Reinforce for all required hardware with high-grade steel plate reinforcement according to the following schedule. Use galvanized plates at galvanized doors and frames.

1. Butt hinges: 7-gauge (3/16") x 1-1/4" x 10" (9" on doors).

2. Closer: 12-gauge.

3. Strike and lock faces: 12-gauge.

4. Lock body: 14-gauge.

5. In lieu of 7-gauge hinge reinforcement plates, a 12-gauge channel may be used, provided that manufacturer submits test results confirming screw retention capacity is not lessened.

6. Do not spot weld reinforcing plates for butts; fillet weld each side of plate.

7. Size closer reinforcement sufficiently large to receive all major sizes and brands of closers.

B. Drill and tap to receive all items of mortise hardware at the fabricator’s plant, to the extent practicable, in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A115. Coordinate work with Hardware Supplier for templates, diameters and locations of screws.

2.06. SHOP FINISH

A. Door and frame shall have bonderized, baked-on prime coat.

B. After fabrication, remove tool marks and surface imperfections. Dress welded joints smooth and leave cut edges clean, with arrises straight and sharply defined.

C. Touch up all welds and scratches with a zinc dust-zinc oxide primer or zinc rich primer. Apply a phosphatizing pre-paint treatment (such as Bonderizing) to the thoroughly cleaned zinc and top with a coat of high grade, rust inhibitive primer.Primers shall be well cured before items are shipped. Touch up all runs, bare spots and smears.

E. Cured primer, as a minimum, shall be capable of passing ANSI 224.1 test criteria.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin HOLLOW METAL WORK 081113-3

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION OF FRAME

A. Prior to installation, check and correct frame per NAAMM recommendations for size, swing, squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness that may affect proper installation.

B. Replace shipping bars at bottom of welded frame with sturdy wood spreader set to assure proper width of opening.

C. Set frame accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, square and true in accordance with NAAMM Standard HMMA 840.

D. Secure base anchors and wall anchors rigidly. Set expansion bolts using workmen experienced in such work. Re-drill improper holes and provide with larger expansion shields.

E. Fasten glazing stops loosely in place with required fasteners, leaving glazing rabbets ready for installation of glass by glazers.

F. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

3.02. TOUCH-UP AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation of frame, sand any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat with a zinc-dust/zinc-oxide primer. Feather out edges.

B. Immediately after installation of door, re-inspect prime coat on door and frame for scratches and rust. Cover bare metal with compatible air-drying primer, feathering out edges.

END 081113.

OEMA-2014-107 081113-4 HOLLOW METAL WORK Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin


SECTION 081416 - WOOD DOORS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Prefinished, prefit, premachined, solid core, flush wood doors with wood veneer face for transparent finish.

2. Preparation of wood doors for hardware.


1. Plastic laminate-faced doors in aluminum frames (alternate) ................ Section 081513. 2. Furnishing and installation of door hardware ......................................... Section 087100. 3. Glass and glazing ................................................................................... Section 088000. 4. Ceramic tile floor thicknesses ................................................................ Section 093013.


A. In addition to the requirements shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section, doors shall conform to Premium Grade requirements of Woodwork Institute’s (WI) “Architectural Woodwork Standards” (AWS), current edition.

1. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for all items specified herein, showing all pertinent construction features, including undercuts, reinforcement and blocking for hardware. Indicate:

1. Veneer species, grade and matching. 2. Factory machining unless none is to be done. 3. Finish materials and processes.

C. Samples: Submit 3 veneer samples at least 8" x 10" showing range of grain and color variations, stain color and sheen of finish.

D. Certificates: Submit with the Shop Drawings a statement signed by an authorized representative of the door manufacturer certifying that the doors and finishes furnished will conform to the requirements of this Section.


A. Deliver doors several days in advance of installation, in order for the doors to acclimatize to the temperatures and humidity of installation, provided that temperature is maintained between 50°F and 90°F and humidity is controlled to stay within 30% to 50% RH.

B. Deliver doors in weatherproof wrappings. Mark packaged doors with door tag numbers corresponding to approved Shop Drawings.

C. Open door packaging upon delivery so as to allow free air flow around the doors.

D. Store doors in dry area, off of floor, with separators between doors to allow air circulation.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin WOOD DOORS 081416-1

1.05. WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s “life of the original installation” warranty providing correction of defective door(s), including veneer delamination, defective materials and finish, core telegraphing, and warping, cupping and bowing beyond specified installation tolerances, without charge to Owner by way of repair or replacement with materials meeting original specifications.

B. Warranty shall bear manufacturer’s certification that the installation was inspected prior to issuance of warranty and that no provisions have been voided or nullified by way of installation or manufacture.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. TYPE AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Construction: Flush, solid core, veneer faced doors of 5-ply hot press, 1-3/4" thick.

B. Finish shall be factory applied.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Hardwood Products Corp. 3. Oshkosh Architectural Doors 4. V.T. Industries, Inc.

2.02. MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Wood Veneer Doors:

1. Face Veneer Species, Grade and Cut: Premium, with Grade A faces. Species as noted on drawings, plain sliced, slip matched. (No rotary or half round sliced veneers accepted.)

2. Crossbands: Hardwood or natural/engineered fiberboard, minimum 1/16" thick, tapeless spliced, no voids.

B. Core: Particleboard core, Grade LD-2.

C. Stiles & Rails:

1. Solid, sound wood or structural composite lumber (SCL), 1-3/8" minimum total width for stiles, 1-1/8" for rails, securely bonded to the core and then abrasively planed before application of face veneers to ensure minimal telegraphing of core parts through veneers.

2. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges of crossbands - edge Type D.

3. At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and spilt resistance. Screw holding capability shall be not less than 475 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

D. Adhesives: WDMA T.M.-6, Type I (waterproof), hot press or high frequency types only.

2.03. LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Species:

1. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: Same species as door faces.

C. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.

OEMA-2014-107 081416-2 WOOD DOORS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

2.04. FABRICATION

A. Fabricate all doors with full-width, fill-length crossbands and bond all components together, including stiles and rails, to core in a hot-press.

B. Prefitting: Trim and prefit all doors to net sizes required to fit frames specified. Hollow metal manufacturer’s Shop Drawings shall control the actual size required. Prefit doors as follows:

1. Width: 3/16", +0", -1/32". 2. At head: 1/8", +1/16", -0". 3. At lock edges: bevel 1/8" in 2". 4. At sill: 5/8" above finish floor.

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.05. FINISH ON WOOD FACES

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on edges of cutouts and mortises, on bottom edge of door, and on top edge of full height doors. Provide full finish system on top edge of 3/4 height doors.

B. Transparent Finish: Premium grade, factory finished with a system meeting or exceeding the performance standards of AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System #11 Catalyzed Polyurethane.

C. Stain color and sheen shall match finish as indicated on Drawings.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

B. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for either size or alignment.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. Fit doors to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory, as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge, and refinish cut door edges to match factory finish.

1. Provide pilot holes for all hinge screws. Use hardware manufacturers’ templates to drill pilot and bolt holes.

2. Trim door width by cutting equally from both jamb edges.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin WOOD DOORS 081416-3

3. Adjust door height by trimming from bottom, but not more than 3/4". Non-fire-rated doors may have up to an additional 1/2" trimmed from the top edge.

4. Do not let clearance under doors exceed 3/4”.

5. Replace doors which have been improperly prepared at factory and which cannot be adjusted without diminishing warranty.

3.03. INSTALLED TOLERANCES

A. The installed doors shall have no distortion in excess of 1/4" when measured from a straightedge applied over a projected door area of 42" x 84" in the following ways:

1. Warp (Diagonal Distortion): Straightedge applied corner to corner. 2. Bow (Vertical Distortion): Straightedge applied top to bottom. 3. Cup (Diagonal Distortion): Straightedge applied edge to edge.

3.04. ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to swing open and shut without binding, and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by gravitational influence.

B. Do not hold doors open by wedging blocks, etc.

C. Replace doors damaged during installation. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely or are unable to stay at rest at any point in their swing.

D. Protection of Completed Work: Protect installed doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the Work. Clean doors just prior to acceptance of the Work.

END 081416.

OEMA-2014-107 081416-4 WOOD DOORS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS

SECTION 081513 – PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Pre-hung plastic laminate faced door with aluminum frames. 2. Preparation of plastic laminate-faced doors for hardware. 3. Installation of pre-hung hardware.


1. Furnishing of door hardware and installation standards ......................... Section 087100. 2. Installation of hardware other than pre-hung hardware .......................... Section 087100. 3. Glass and glazing ................................................................................... Section 088000.


A. In addition to the requirements shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section, doors shall conform to:

1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)-Architectural Woodwork Standards, current edition.

2. NEMA LD 3 – High Pressure Decorative Laminates

3. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) - WWDA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; current edition.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings coordinated with door frame and hardware requirements.

1. Indicate AWI construction type/grade and construction details, WDMA I.S.1-A performance grade, door core materials, and plastic laminate selection and grade.

2. Indicate door elevations and locations, materials, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, edge profiles and finishes, blocking for hardware, and cut outs for glazing.

3. Indicate door frame elevations and locations, materials, profiles, sizes, finishes, construction at joints, reinforcement for hardware, attachment system and fasteners.

4. Show accessories provided. Indicate hardware to be factory installed.

D. Samples:

1. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two color charts representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

2. Submit 3 veneer samples at least 8" x 10" showing range of patterns and color variations and sheen of finish.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS 081513-1

E. Certificates: Submit with the Shop Drawings a statement signed by an authorized representative of the door manufacturer certifying that the doors and finishes furnished will conform to the requirements of this Section.


A. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. Inspect doors and frames for damage upon delivery. Protect from moisture.

B. Deliver doors and frames in weatherproof wrappings.

C. Mark packaged doors with door tag numbers corresponding to approved Shop Drawings.

D. Store doors in dry area, off of floor, with separators between doors to allow air circulation. Comply with manufacturers environmental limitations.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete and HVAC system is operating.

2. Maintain the following temperature and humidity limits during storage, installation and until Substantial Completion: a. Temperature: 60 to 80 degrees F. b. Humidity: 35 to 55 %.

1.06. WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s “life of the original installation” warranty providing correction of defective door(s), including veneer delamination, defective materials and finish, core telegraphing, and warping, cupping and bowing beyond specified installation tolerances, without charge to Owner by way of repair or replacement with materials meeting original specifications.

B. Warranty shall bear manufacturer’s certification that the installation was inspected prior to issuance of warranty and that no provisions have been voided or nullified by way of installation or manufacture.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Marlite; 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622. ASD. Tel: (330) 343-6621. Fax: (330) 343-7296. Email: [email protected] www.marlite.com

B. Substitutions: Comparable products of other manufacturer’s as approved by Architect.

2.02. MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Non-Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Flush wood doors faced with 0.050 inch thick high pressure plastic laminate.

1. Type: Particleboard core type, complying with AWI Type PC-HPDL-5 and conforming to WDMA WWDA I.S.1-A; with average 30 pcf density core complying with ANSI A208.1 Grade LD-1.

2. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS (0.048 inch thick), high pressure plastic laminate, color and pattern selected from manufacturer's full range of high pressure plastic laminate.

3. Edge Banding:

OEMA-2014-107 081513-2 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin


a. Full Size Doors: Laminate matching door face on vertical edges, top and bottom edges sealed.

b. Toilet Stall Doors: Laminate matching door face on all edges.

4. Crossbands: 1/10 inch thick 3-ply wood crossbanding.

5. Total Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

6. Core Edges: Structural composite lumber.

7. Stiles and Rails: Solid hardwood lumber.

8. Stile Width: 1-3/8 inches before trimming.

9. Top & Bottom Rail Heights: 1-3/8 inches before trimming.

10. Factory prefit and premachined for hardware that is not surface applied. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

11. Cutouts for lights made at factory; provide matching stops.

12. Face Plane Tolerance (Telegraphing): Variation in surface of face not more than 1/100 inch from true plane in any 3 inch span.

13. Warp Tolerance: Bow, cup, and twist not more than 1/4 inch in any 42 inches wide by 84 inches high area, or less.

B. Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and as listed on drawings.

C. Aluminum Door Frames: Marlite AAA (Aluminum Adjustable Architectural) consisting of all standard components, extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 and with a clear satin anodized finish, frame series to fit wall condition.

1. Frame shall have continuous vinyl gasket on stop. 2. Corners shall have tight fitting mitered joints with concealed steel gusset connection. 3. Prepare frames for hardware specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and on the

Drawings. 4. Provide components as required for actual wall thicknesses at each door/frame condition,

including wall finishes.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Securely anchor door frames straight, plumb and level without distortion and in accordance with approved shop drawings. Brace frames in position until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

C. Install doors in frames plumb and true, without rack, and so doors do not fall open or closed simply due to gravity.

D. Install doors with all hardware specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and as listed on drawings.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install doors with not more than 1/8 inch clearance at sides.

3.02. ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust door and frame for free operation without binding, rack, or warp.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS 081513-3

B. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to swing open and shut without binding, and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by gravitational influence.

C. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely or are unable to stay at rest at any point in their swing.

D. Protection of Completed Work: Protect installed doors and frames from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the Work. Replace doors and/or frames that have been damaged. Clean doors and frames just prior to acceptance of the Work.

END 081513.

OEMA-2014-107 081513-4 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin


SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Aluminum framing for fixed aluminum windows. 2. Aluminum framing for entrance doors, sidelites, transoms and associated windows at entrance

enclosures. 3. Aluminum entrance doors. 4. Service window unit with operating hardware. 5. Preparation for and installation of finish door hardware. 6. Perimeter sealant installation.


1. Standards for sealants, including installation ......................................... Section 079200. 2. Furnishing of and installation standards for hardware ........................... Section 087100. 3. Glass and glazing ................................................................................... Section 088000.


A. Thermal break components shall be manufactured to meet the following standards:

1. AAMA QAG 1–09, “Quality Assurance Processing & Monitoring Guide for Poured and Debridged Polyurethane Thermal Barriers.”

2. AAMA TIR A8–08, “Structural Performance of Composite Thermal Barrier Framing Systems.”

3. AAMA 505-09, “Dry Shrinkage and Composite Performance Thermal Cycling Test Procedure.”

B. Sources of Supply: All materials provided under this Section shall be products of one manufacturer.

C. Coordination: Coordinate with Finish Hardware Supplier as required to assure proper fitting of hardware items furnished under Section 087100 “Finish Hardware”.

1. Install hardware according to templates approved by hardware item manufacturers.

2. Report to General Contractor in writing should templates not be delivered by Hardware Supplier in sufficient time to meet construction schedules.

1.03. MOCKUP


1.04. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, registered in the State of Wisconsin, to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 084113-1

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.26 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.05. SUBMITTALS


OEMA-2014-107 084113-2 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations and details, including gaskets, weatherstripping, methods of anchoring, type of alloy, finish, size and thickness of individual parts, dissimilar metal protection.

C. Certificates: Anodized aluminum pieces shall be furnished with a letter of certification from the anodizer affirming that the items furnished have been finished according to the standard specified.

1.06. PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Uncrate doors, frames and related accessories; and store in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

B. Remove all padding and packing in contact with aluminum immediately upon arrival in order to prevent staining.

1.07. WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace units whose components that do not comply with

requirements or that fail due to inferior materials or workmanship within 10 years of installation.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Air infiltration through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.

2. PRODUCT 2.01. MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE

A. Doorframes and Framing for Entrance Sidelights and Transoms: Thermal-break type with nominal profile of 2” x 4-1/2”, center glazed. Furnish one of the below listed models:

1. “451T” by Kawneer Company. 2. “Series 3000 XT” by Vistawall Architectural Products (Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope). 3. “Series 403 T” by EFCO Corporation.

B. Service Window: Aluminum and stainless steel unit with clear 5/8" insulating glass, Model IFSC-4040 by Quikserv Corp., Houston, Texas, tel. 800-388-8307.

C. Framing for Fixed Windows: Same framing as at entries.

D. Aluminum Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. Medium stile, 3-1/2-inch nominal width.

1. Door Construction:

a. At doors indicated to be thermally broken: 2- to 2-1/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 inch thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

1) Thermal construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

b. At all other doors: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.


2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

3. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

E. Aluminum members, frames, glazing beads and mullions shall be extruded from 6063T alloy of suitable temper, having a minimum tensile strength of 28,000 psi.

1. Major frame components shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.090 inch.

2. Aluminum glazing beads shall be snap-in type with a minimum wall thickness of 0.050 inch and glazing legs no less than 3/4" high.

3. Sills/subsills shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.070 inch.

F. Frame Thermal Breaks: Manufacturer’s standard type. Poured in place polyurethane thermal break material shall have a maximum tensile strength of 4,300 psi.

2.02. ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Aluminum or steel. Steel anchors must be primed with shop coat of approved zinc chromate primer and be insulated from the aluminum members.

B. Fasteners:

1. Frame Assembly Fasteners: Non-magnetic stainless steel.

2. Miscellaneous Fasteners: Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel with finish color to match frames where exposed to view.

3. For fastening anchors to building construction, use expansion bolts, toggle bolts or screws, as required by building construction material, not less than 1/4" diameter, made of cadmium or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A 164 and A 165.

4. Screws in masonry shall be equal to Rawl “Tappers.” No plastic expansion anchors allowed, except U.S. Anchor’s “Mungo Plugs” allowed in masonry.

C. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Alkali resistant, asbestos free bituminous paint conforming to ASTM D1187, plastic separators, insulating tapes or manufacturer’s standard.

D. Glazing Seals: Extruded EPDM, vinyl, neoprene or silicone dry gasket seals with impervious skins standard to entrance manufacturer, solid gray color selected from supplier’s standard color options. Vinyl shall meet or exceed CS 230 standards.

E. Weatherstripping: Thermoplastic elastomer weatherstrip system on all sides of exterior doors and/or frames, meeting AAMA 701/702 requirements. Provide surface applied bottom weatherstrip with flexible blade gasket at bottoms of doors.

F. Sills/Subsills: Extruded aluminum sections shall assure that any water entering the glazing channels will be positively weeped to the exterior. Furnish sills with sub-structural components, such as legs and/or blocking, so as to assure complete support of the sill across the window opening.

G. Sealants: Furnish type as required in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

2.03. FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble in as large sections in shop as consistent with shipping and field

requirements.

B. All joints shall form flush, hairline joints.

C. All joints between sections and all field splices shall produce strength to resist misalignment and deformations due to imposed loads.

OEMA-2014-107 084113-4 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

D. Reinforce the mullions to support glass and framing to withstand a wind load of 25 psf without deflection exceeding 1/175 of any span. Provide snap-in stops for doors. Stops on any exterior side shall be lock-in tamperproof type.

E. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass.

F. Doors shall have dual moment corner construction consisting of mechanical fastening using extruded aluminum channel clips and bolt fasteners and SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and fillet welds.

G. Where installation conditions do not allow interior vestibule doors to be raised at the time of installation so as to allow 3/4" clearance over floors, to clear floor mats, the doors shall be undercut as required to obtain the 3/4" clearance.

H. Reinforce doors and frames for hardware with backing plates of non-magnetic steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 36.

1. Reinforce for closers with 10-gauge steel plate and 12-gauge plate for all other hardware.

2. Reinforce for all other cutouts and mortises similarly.

I. Provide positive means to drain to the outside any water entering the system. Weep holes shall be baffled to prevent winds from preventing free drainage.

2.04. FINISH A. Aluminum members shall be furnished with Clear Anodic Finish in compliance with AAMA 611,

AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018mm or thicker.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION

A. Examine all surfaces to receive parts of the work specified herein. Verify all dimensions of in-place and subsequent construction. Installation of frames shall constitute acceptance of the existing conditions.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. All surfaces that contact steel, concrete or stone masonry construction shall be prepared with dissimilar protection materials hereinbefore specified. Aluminum surfaces to remain exposed shall be protected from bituminous paint application.

3.03. INSTALLATION A. Set frames in locations shown, level, plumb and in line. Seal joints between framing members and

mullions. Where moldings are joined, accurately cut and fit members to result in tightly closed joints.

B. Do not use exposed fasteners except as approved by Owner.

C. Cut, join and seal members to form positive paths of drainage within the framing in order to prevent any water that may enter the system from leaking through to the interior of the building.

D. Hardware: Install hardware under requirements of Section 087100 “Finish Hardware.”

E. Perimeter Sealant: Apply sealant to inside and outside joints of frame perimeters adjacent to other constructions, using materials and methods specified in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

F. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of frames and doors, exercising care to avoid damage of the protective coating (if any). Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances.

END 084113.



SECTION 087100 - FINISH HARDWARE

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Furnishing and installation of finish hardware for interior wood doors in hollow metal frames.

2. Furnishing of finish hardware for interior plastic laminate-faced doors in aluminum frames. Finish hardware required for pre-hanging of door in frames shall be installed under Section 081513 “Plastic Laminate Faced Doors” (according to standards specified herein), all other hardware shall be installed under this section.

3. Furnishing and installation of finish hardware for exterior hollow metal doors and frames.

4. Furnishing of finish hardware for interior and exterior aluminum doors in aluminum framing. Finish hardware shall be installed under Section 084113 “Aluminum Storefront Systems” according to the standards specified herein.

5. Furnishing and installation of other finish hardware not described herein or in other Sections of the Specifications but required for a complete and operable facility.


1. Hardware maintenance info for O&M manual ....................................... Section 013300. 2. Sealant for exterior thresholds ................................................................ Section 079200. 3. Hollow metal doors, frames & silencers ................................................ Section 081113. 4. Wood veneer-faced doors ....................................................................... Section 081416. 5. Plastic laminate-faced doors in aluminum frames .................................. Section 081513. 6. Aluminum entrance doors, frames with integral weatherstripping ......... Section 084113.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier's Qualifications: A recognized builder's hardware supplier who has been furnishing

hardware in the area of the Project for not less than 5 years, and who has in his employ an experienced Hardware Consultant available at all reasonable times during the course of the work, for project hardware consultation to the Owner and Contractor.

B. Workmen's Qualifications: Installation of hardware shall be assigned to experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade union jurisdictions; either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the Project Site, at Contractor's option.

C. Code Requirements: All finish hardware shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the applicable code authorities, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and Wisconsin Accessibility Code, irrespective of any other requirements of these specifications.

D. Coordination: Finish Hardware Supplier shall examine Shop Drawings of the wood veneer-faced door manufacturer, plastic laminate-faced door manufacturer, aluminum door manufacturer and hollow metal manufacturer and assume responsibility for coordination of all special details and requirements with each door and frame supplier.

E. Templates: Furnish 2 copies of all necessary templates and a detailed “Template Transmittal” letter to the wood veneer-faced door manufacturer, plastic laminate-face door manufacturer, aluminum door manufacturer, and hollow metal manufacturer within 48 hours after receipt of the reviewed final Finish Hardware Schedule.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin FINISH HARDWARE 087100-1

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Finish Hardware Schedule:

1. Within 30 calendar days after award of Contract for general construction, and before any materials are ordered, submit for review 8 copies of the complete Finish Hardware Schedule.

2. The Schedule shall clearly indicate swing, location, stile type, size and thickness of each door, including meeting stile conditions, as well as the manufacturer, type, number, and finish of each item of hardware required. The degree of swing for all doors must be specifically indicated.

C. Samples:

1. Upon request, submit samples of hardware items for review.

2. Samples that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the Work.

D. Operations & Maintenance (O&M) Manual: Submit to General Contractor for inclusion in the O&M manuals, as specified in Section 013300 “Submittals”, copies of the final approved Hardware Schedule, Key Schedule, installation instruction sheets and maintenance recommendations.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hardware Items for Installation by Others: Deliver to the aluminum door/frame manufacturer or

installer and the plastic laminate-faced door/frame manufacturer in one shipment each, clearly marked to identify the job and door locations for which the hardware items are intended.

B. Delivery and Storage: Upon delivery to site, General Contractor shall assume responsibility for hardware against all losses, defacement, etc.

1. All items shall be clearly identified. Label each item with manufacturer's name and designation for the item. Each keyed lock or cylinder shall be clearly marked for use on a specific door.

2. Each container or package shall contain the necessary fasteners, templates, and instructions for installation.

C. Keys: Do not deliver to site nor store keys on-site. Deliver keys directly from manufacturer to Owner.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS AND FABRICATIONS A. Items listed in the Hardware Sets shall be manufactured by the named manufacturer and furnished

without substitution.

B. Screws and Fastenings: Furnish Phillips head screws and bolts for all items of hardware. No TEK screws allowed.

1. Furnish all thresholds with Ackerman Johnson “Star Type” anchors and machine screws.

2. Furnish hinges for hollow metal and aluminum doors and/or frames with self-cleaning machine screws.

3. Furnish 5% surplus fasteners for all items of hardware.

OEMA-2014-107 087100-2 FINISH HARDWARE Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

C. Closers: Hydraulically controlled, full rack and pinion in operation, with adjustable general speed, latching speed, separate back-check control, and adjustable spring tension conforming to accessibility codes.

1. Closer fluid shall be “all weather” type not subject to normal temperature changes.

2. Select the closer type that will mount closer on the less commonly seen side of interior doors and on the interior side of exterior doors.

3. Accessories: Furnish the necessary arms, brackets, and other accessories to clear overhead stops and to suit the approved job conditions. Where parallel-arm closers are indicated, furnish units one size larger than recommended for standard arm units.

2.02. KEYING

A. Key Schedule: Shall be prepared by the Finish Hardware Supplier, in consultation with Owner before any locks are ordered. The keying designations used in the Schedule shall conform to DHI’s “Keying System and Nomenclature.”

B. Key Control: Furnish all locks and cylinders with a visual key control system. All keys and corresponding cylinder faces shall be stamped with the applicable key group indicated in the Finish Hardware Schedule. All keys shall be stamped “Do Not Duplicate”. No other stamping shall appear on keys.

C. Keys: All locks shall be keyed by the manufacturer and all keys shall be factory registered and recorded. Deliver 1 copy of the key bitting list to the Owner on request.

1. Furnish all locks and cylinders with a construction master key system. Furnish construction master keys to the Contractor via certified mail. Upon occupancy by the Owner, all keys shall be delivered to the Owner in sealed envelopes.

2. Furnish master keys for each master key group and the quantity of change keys for each key group as requested by the Owner.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. HARDWARE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS A. Hardware shall be mounted at the following heights unless scheduled otherwise:

1. Exit Devices .................... Per manufacturer's template. 2. Closers ............................. Per mfr's template for each condition of door swing. 3. Butt Hinges ...................... 5" - 10" - equal - equal. 4. Locks ............................... 38" above floor to centerline of lever. 5. Push-Pull Sets .................. 40" above floor to centerline of mounting pad. 6. Deadlocks ........................ 48" above floor to centerline of cylinder.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

B. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware, cut and fit as required, install the hardware item completely and then remove and store it in a secure place during the application of the finish. After completion of the finishes, re-install each hardware item.

C. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer's maintenance instructions before attaching closers. Adjust so as to swing open and shut without binding, and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by gravitational influence. Do not use paper, cardboard or other compressible shims to adjust butt alignment.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin FINISH HARDWARE 087100-3

D. Closers: Mount to provide maximum opening permitted by building construction or equipment.

E. Mount lock cylinders such that key enters with its smooth edge down.

F. Weatherstripping: Weatherstrips at hinge side shall be applied at the side of the door. Weatherstrips at head and lock side shall be applied to the doorstops. Secure weatherstrips to metal doors and frames with aluminum sheet metal screws finished to match weatherstripping.

G. Set exterior thresholds in double bead of sealant as specified in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

H. Tag and index the keys. Deliver the keys to Owner at completion and acceptance of work.

I. Adjust, and protect from injury all installed hardware. Cover door levers, push bars and pulls with heavy cloth until project acceptance.

3.03. QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection for Punch List: The Hardware Supplier shall inspect all hardware installed under this

Section in order to verify that each item was properly installed and is operating appropriately. The Hardware Supplier shall then prepare a typewritten list of defects and errors requiring correction, which shall be attached to the Final Punch List. These inspections and reports shall continue until Final Acceptance.

3.04. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. One month after Owner occupies the Work, return to site, and adjust and check each operating item

of hardware, to ensure proper operation and function.

B. Lubricate moving parts with lubricant recommended by manufacturer.

C. Replace units that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

END 087100.

OEMA-2014-107 087100-4 FINISH HARDWARE Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin


SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Glazing of exterior windows. 2. Glazing of aluminum entrance vestibules, sidelights, transoms and doors. 3. Glazing of lites in flush doors.


1. Final cleaning of glass ............................................................................ Section 015001. 2. Glazing stops in hollow metal door ........................................................ Section 081113. 3. Glazing stops in wood- or plastic laminate-faced doors ......................... Section 081416. 4. Glazing gaskets for aluminum entrances ................................................ Section 084113. 5. Factory glazed service window .............................................................. Section 084113.


A. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations, including the Consumer Product Safety Commission Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR 1201) and the State of Wisconsin safety glazing requirements.

B. Comply with all pertinent recommendations in the “Glazing Manual” of the Glass Association of North America (GANA).

C. Each pane of glass shall bear the manufacturer’s mark designating the type and thickness of glass per IBC requirements. Glass without labels imprinted onto glass shall be rejected.

1.03. MOCKUP


1.04. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers’ product data describing each type of glass and glazing item specified herein.

C. Guarantees and Warranties:

1. Submit installer’s written guarantee of leakproof installation. 2. Submit insulated glass fabricator’s warranty of seal integrity.

1.05. PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin GLAZING 088000-1

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective

measures including the use of specially formulated primers.

1.06. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver glazing materials to job site in sealed containers with manufacturer’s original labels attached

to each piece of glass. Provide safety labels imprinted onto tempered glass. Provide cushions at edges to prevent impact damage.

B. Store glass on edge, under cover and protect from staining.

C. Avoid deformation of units. Protect faces from scratches and abrasion.

D. Do not rotate or “pitch” glass about corners. Use rolling blocks.

E. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

1.07. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Do no glazing when ambient temperature or temperature of sash is below 40°F.

1.08. WARRANTIES

A. Installer shall guarantee installed work to be waterproof for a period of 5 years.

B. Insulating glass units shall be warranted for 10 years against failure, including interpane dusting or misting and internal dew point rising above -50°F. Warranty shall provide for replacement of glass and glazing, including labor.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. GLASS

A. Acceptable Glass Manufacturers:

1. Guardian. 2. Pilkington. 3. PPG Industries.

B. Acceptable Glass Fabricators:

1. Guardian. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope. 3. Trulite Glass. 4. Viracon.

C. General: Temper individual glass units as required to meet safety requirements and as otherwise shown on Drawings. Label each tempered pane with imprinted safety label.

D. Types and Qualities: Where indicated on Drawings and where required by applicable codes, provide fully tempered float glass. Where not required to be fully tempered, provide heat strengthened float glass. These requirements shall apply to both panes of insulated glass.

OEMA-2014-107 088000-2 GLAZING Culver’s Restaurant –Janesville, Wisconsin

1. Clear Annealed Float Glass: 1/4" thick, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality Q3.

2. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

3. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

E. Insulating Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. Provide manufacturer’s standard spacer and dual sealing system with primary and secondary sealants.

1. Clear: 1 inch thick units (fully tempered where indicated), consisting of an outer minimum 1/4 inch pane of clear float glass and an inner minimum 1/4 inch pane of clear float glass separated by a desiccated 1/2 inch air space, with a low reflective low-emissivity (Low-E) coating on the #2 or #3 surface. Provide insulated units with maximum Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) of 0.57 and a visible light transmittance of 70%.

a. For exterior doors, where scheduled, furnish 1 inch thick clear insulating units. b. Units shall have manufacturer’s 10-year warranty. c. Basis of Design is PPG Architectural Glass “Sungate 600 (2) Clear + Clear”. Furnish

specified product or equal product by one of the following manufacturers: 1) Pilkington. 2) Guardian. 3) Oldcastle Building Envelope. 4) Viracon. 5) Trulite Glass. 6) Or approved equal.

F. Provide white muntins between panes of insulating glass units where shown.

2.02. GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Use products of the following:

1. Tremco Manufacturing Co. 2. G.E. 3. Dap, Inc. 4. Pecora Corp.

B. Glazing Seals for Aluminum Sash: Furnished by aluminum sash manufacturer.

C. Glazing Seals for Exterior Hollow Metal Opening:

1. Exterior Side: One-part acrylic terpolymer or one-part silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, G, A.

2. Interior Side: Preformed, pre-shimmed polyisobutylene-butyl rubber sealant tape and custom extruded elastomer gasket material, meeting, as a minimum, AAMA 804.1 or 806.1.

D. Glazing Seals for Interior Wood- or Plastic Laminate-Faced Doors:

1. Glazing Tape: Preformed, polyisobutylene-butyl rubber adhesive faced, rubber tape, with or without continuous shim as required, meeting, as a minimum, AAMA 804.1 or 806.1.


2. Glazing Felt: Wool felt with adhesive back, treated to be non-wicking and non-staining.

E. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80-90 durometer hardness, having proven compatibility with sealants used, width of rabbet less 1/16" by lengths sufficient for weight of glass supported.

F. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, having proven compatibility with sealants used.

G. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

2.03. FABRICATION

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Condition of Surfaces:

1. Examine all surfaces and dimensions prior to application and notify General Contractor of any conditions detrimental to satisfactory glazing.

2. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Inspect each piece of glass before installation, and eliminate any that have observable edge damage or face imperfections.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Clean the glazing channel or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to the substrate. Prepare metal surfaces as indicated by manufacturer of sealant to be used. Verify that weep holes are free of obstructions.

B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer.

C. Cut glass with smooth straight edges to full sizes required by openings. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass that is tempered, heat strengthened, or coated.

D. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.03. INSTALLATION OF GLASS

A. General:

1. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.


3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

a. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

8. Install with proper bite and clearances all around.

9. Glass having waviness shall be set with waves placed horizontally. Lites viewed in series or as a group shall have uniform draw, bow and similar characteristics.

B. Aluminum Windows: Glaze with Dry Gasket method, the same as for aluminum entrances.

C. Aluminum Entrances: Glaze with Dry Gasket method as follows:

1. Install gaskets according to gasket manufacturer’s recommendations, including the use of primers and adhesives.

2. Cut fixed-stop gaskets to lengths required and fit into sash without stretching or compressing. Miter corners of gaskets and seal corners by vulcanizing, welding or dabbing with butyl sealant.

3. Engage gasket material with retainers in removable stops and trim to proper lengths. Verify that when gaskets are properly fit they will attain full contact all around perimeter and exert a pressure of at least 4 pounds per linear inch of glass when snapped into place. Seal corners between removable stops by dabbing with butyl sealant.

D. Exterior Lites In Hollow Metal Door: Glaze with Tape and Sealant method as follows:

1. Cut preformed sealant tape to proper length on a clean, flat work surface prior to application. Apply tape to permanent stops slightly in from edge of stop (to entire length of head and sill first, then in between to the jambs). Butt tape together with no overlap. Remove paper facing and daub butted corner joints with sealant.

2. Maintain a 1/8" minimum clearance for glazing material between glass and sash, both on the interior and exterior.

3. Center glass in opening and firmly place against tape.

4. Fill gap between glass and removable stop with continuous bead of silicone sealant, maintaining a 3/16" minimum bite to glass and a positive bond to stop.

5. Cap the tape with a continuous bead of silicone sealant. Apply cap bead of same sealant over glazing at removable stops. Tool sealant bead with solvent to produce a smooth surface sloped away from glass. Clean the glass of excess sealant.


E. Interior Lites: Glaze the lites using glazing felt or glazing tape adhered to stops on each side of the pane. Use as many layers of felt or tape as required to hold glass snuggly. Maintain even sightlines, trimming felt or tape as necessary.

F. All glass shall be left whole, free from checks or other defects. Any defective glass that may appear after cleaning shall be removed and replaced with perfect glass.

END 088000.


DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Gypsum board for interior walls. 2. Gypsum board for interior flush ceilings and bulkheads. 3. Gypsum board for covering vapor barriers. 4. Cementitious underlayment for wall finishes where shown. 5. Metal stud framing for interior partitions so designated. 6. Acoustical sealants. 7. Joint treatment and gypsum board accessories.


1. Cutting and patching gypsum board incidental to work ................................ Section 015001. 2. Wood blocking in steel stud framing ............................................................. Section 061000. 3. Thermal & acoustical batt insulation in walls ............................................... Section 072100. 4. Vapor barrier at exterior walls ....................................................................... Section 072100. 5. Sealants exposed to view ............................................................................... Section 079200. 6. Finish painting ............................................................................................... Section 099000.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use products of a single manufacturer as necessary to maintain compatibility of materials.

1.03. JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements:

1. A uniform room temperature between 55°F and 70°F shall be maintained in cold weather one week prior to application, during application and until completely dry. Temperature fluctuations shall not exceed 2°F per 24 hours.

2. Gypsum board subcontractor shall provide adequate ventilation for drying out of joint compounds without allowing rapid drying.

1.04. SUBMITTALS


B. Provide Product Data on gypsum boards, gypsum sheathing, metal framing, edge beads, control joints and joint compounds.

1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Materials shall be delivered to site in original packages or containers bearing manufacturer’s brand

name and type of material.

B. Store materials in dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the ground. Protect board and materials from damage by moisture, ground dampness, heat, sun and other causes.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092116-1

C. Gypsum panels shall be supported flat and level during transport and storage. Provide supports across width of panels, not more than 16" apart. Store gypsum board above ground or slab.

D. Protect all finished work during the progress of gypsum board work and repair any damage done to such work.

1.06. WARRANTIES

A. Sheathing: Furnish sheathing manufacturer’s standard warranty covering in-place exposure damage for 6 months, commencing on date of Installer’s purchase.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs: Zinc coated steel channel studs, 20-gauge, 6" and 3-5/8" size as indicated, conforming to

ANSI/ASTM C 645 or GA 201 or GA 216.

B. Runner Tracks: 20-gauge metal, matching stud width.

2.02. PANELS

A. Gypsum Board for Most Walls: Regular, standard taper, rounded edge, conforming to ANSI/ASTM C 36, 5/8" thick.

1. Use Type X when applied to steel studs.

B. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board (where noted on Drawings): ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces with tapered long edges.

1. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

C. Gypsum Board for Ceilings & Bulkheads: Type X, standard taper, rounded edge, 5/8" thick.

D. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. Mold resistance, ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. Reinforced portland cement panels. Subject to requirements, provide one of the following:

1. “1/2” Gold Bond PermaBase Cement Board” by National Gypsum Co. 2. “Durock” by U.S.G. Industries. 3. “Latapanel” by Laticrete International, Inc. 4. “1/2" WonderBoard” by Modulars, Inc. 5. “Cemroc” by Eternit 6. 1/2" “Util-A-Crete” by FinPan, Inc.

2.03. FINISH MATERIALS A. Edge and Corner Reinforcement:

1. Corner Beads: Paper-faced heavy gauge metal or plastic with extra wide flanges, equal to USG “B1XW EL” or No-Coat “Ultracorner”.

2. Edge Beads: Paper-faced heavy gauge metal or plastic “L” type with extra wide flanges, equal to USG “B4 (1")” or No-Coat “L Trim”.

3. Control Joint Beads: Flexible expansion channel, such as USG #093 or Gold Bond “.093 Zinc Control Joint.”

B. Joint Treatment Materials:

OEMA-2014-107 092116-2 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

1. Reinforcing Tape for Gypsum Board: Perforated joint reinforcing tape, paper or fiberglass, asbestos free.

2. Reinforcing Tape for Cementitious Backer Board: 2" wide, adhesive faced, 10 x 10 mesh fiberglass with polymer, alkali-resistant coating.

3. Joint Compound for Gypsum Board: Ready mixed all-purpose gypsum board joint compound, type and mix as required for conditions of humidity and temperature. Use topping type compound for finishing coats.

2.04. ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Acoustical Seals: One of the following:

1. USG “Acoustical Sealant” 2. W.W. Henry Co. “313 Sound Control Sealant” 3. Tremco “Acoustical Sealant” 4. Pecora “Acoustical Sealant BA-98” 5. Norton “Norseal V730 and V740FR Acoustical Foam Tape”

B. Fasteners: Screws meeting ASTM C 954 and the following:

1. For metal to metal framing: 1/2" long, Type S, shallow pan-head screws. 2. For attachment of metal framing to wood: 1-1/4" Type W screws. 3. For cement board: Corrosion resistant, flat-head countersunk or thin washer-head screws. 4. For regular gypsum board: 1-1/4" Type S bugle-head screws. 5. For tracks to concrete: Powder-actuated stud pins sized to penetrate concrete at least 1/2".

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION A. Examine and inspect materials to which gypsum board is to be applied. Report any damp conditions

and verify that cause of dampness is rectified before beginning gypsum board installation.

B. Before beginning installation of gypsum board walls and ceilings, verify that work to be enclosed by gypsum board, particularly mechanical, electrical and firestopping work, has been completed, inspected and approved by the governing authority.

C. Verify that penetrations in partitions (such as electrical outlets, etc.) will not be located back to back but will be separated by at least 2 studs. Report to Contractor any such conditions and do not proceed with work until situations have been rectified.

3.02. STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks, straight and true, accurately aligned to the layout at base and at tops of studs. Set floor track in a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Secure track at each end and a maximum of 24" o.c. in between. Use powder actuated pin anchors for anchoring to concrete.

B. Set studs plumb, not more than 16" o.c. In each line of studs, face flanges all in the same direction.

C. All studs shall extend full height to structure above.

D. Studs shall engage both floor and top runners. Secure studs to tracks with 2 screws at top and 2 screws at bottom, one each at both inside and outside flanges.

E. At top track, provide compressible filler strip at least 1/2" thick between top runners and structure above. Provide multiple runner track installation to accommodate ceiling deflection.

F. Do not cut stud flanges to accommodate pipes, conduit, etc.


3.03. ACOUSTICAL ISOLATION A. Verify that penetrations for ducts or structural framing in gypsum board constructions have been

made soundproof, using furring, acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant as required.

B. Verify that all electrical penetrations and other wall penetrations are surrounded with sound attenuation blanket extending at least 12" around the opening.

C. Apply acoustical sealant to seal all cutouts, such as at electrical boxes and conduit.

D. Apply sealant continuously to joint between gypsum board and bottom of all interior partition framing. Also seal any untaped edges or corner joints butting into other wall materials.

E. Ensure that control joints are filled with insulation.

3.04. GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Do not commence installation until insulation batts and all items to be installed inside partitions or

above ceilings are in place and have been inspected and approved by the governing authority.

B. Install gypsum wallboard first to ceilings, then to walls and soffits. Allow the joint between ceiling and wall to “float,” holding ceiling screws back 7" from intersection and wall screws back 8".

C. Install gypsum board panels to walls and ceilings in single layer construction.

D. Install boards for walls with tapered edges vertical, in line with framing.

1. Hold gypsum wall boards approximately 3/8" up from floors.

2. Provide gypsum board on both sides of partition studs above ceilings. Extend board until flush with top of framing.

E. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with approved sealant.

F. Ceilings and Soffits: Erect boards with tapered edges perpendicular to supports. Place panel end joints only over supports and stagger end joints adjacent to one another.

G. Attachment: Install gypsum board with gypsum board screws 12" o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. along edges.

1. Place edge screws 3/8" in from edges. Stagger screws in adjacent sheets on opposite sides of joints. Screws shall proceed from central portion of board toward ends and edges.

2. Screws shall be driven home slightly below the surface of the board without breaking the paper. Keep screw-driving clutches properly adjusted.

H. Joints:

1. Boards shall be brought into contact with each other but shall not be forced into place. Butt tapered edges only to tapered edges.

2. Locate all joints parallel to framing members only over the center of framing members. Joints on opposite sides of partition shall not occur on the same stud.

3. Joints intersecting openings, such as for doors or windows, shall be held at least 12" away from any corner; and joints parallel to sides of door or window openings shall be held at least 12" away from the opening.

3.05. CEMENT BOARD INSTALLATION A. Erect panels with manufacturer’s recommended moisture resistant screws, placing vertical and

horizontal edges of panels over firm bearing.

B. Add framing as required to support all edges on framing.

C. Treat cut edges and finish in cement board in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

OEMA-2014-107 092116-4 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

D. Attach panels with manufacturer’s recommended moisture resistant screws 8” o.c. along edges and each framing member.

3.06. FINISHING

A. Corner and Edge Beads:

1. All vertical and horizontal external corners below the plane of the ceiling, except ceramic tile backer board, shall be reinforced with corner bead fastened in a full bed of joint compound.

2. At all exposed edges and where board terminates against windows or other dissimilar materials, apply metal trim over board edge and fasten in a full bed of joint compound.

3. Use longest lengths practicable. Keep beads straight and plumb.

B. Joint Reinforcement:

1. All joints not covered by a corner bead are to be taped and compounded, above and below ceilings.

2. Joint tape shall be centered over the joint and embedded in a uniformly thin layer of joint compound approximately 4" wide with sufficient material under tape to provide proper bond.

3. Cement Board: Tack fiberglass tape over joints (for embedment by ceramic tile installers).

C. Compounding and Finishing: Sand each coat after compound has dried, as necessary to provide smooth finished result in surfaces to be painted or to receive wall covering. Take care not to scuff paper surface of board when sanding.

1. Use topping compound for final joint coating of painted gypsum board.

2. Flush Joints between Panels Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. tape applied in a coat of compound and covered with 2 coats of compound, except that first covering coat shall extend to 3" beyond each edge of bedding coat, and second covering coat shall extend to 3" beyond each edge of previous coat. Feather the coats onto adjoining surfaces.

3. Internal Corners Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. tape applied in a coat of compound and covered with 1 coat of compound, using methods similar to field joints.

4. External Corners and Edges Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. cover the flanges of corner and casing beads with 3 coats of compound, except that second and third coats are to be extended 3" beyond the previous coat.

5. Fastener Dimples Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. 3 coats of compound, including the spreading of each coat beyond the previous coat.

6. Joints and Corners above Lay-In Ceiling: GA-214 Level 1; i.e. tape applied in a coat of compound.

7. Fastener Dimples above Lay-In Ceiling: GA-214 Level 1; i.e. no compound required.

END 092116.



SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC & QUARRY TILE

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Ceramic paver tile floors. 2. Quarry tile floors. 3. Tile base for quarry tile and paver tile floors. 4. Waterproofing membrane. 5. Ceramic tile walls. 6. Ceramic tile wall accent areas.


1. Concrete finishes to receive floor tile ..................................................... Section 033000. 2. Floor screed in cooler and freezer rooms ................................................ Section 033000. 3. Sealants for control joints and edges ...................................................... Section 079200. 4. Gypsum board to receive wall tile & base tile ........................................ Section 092116.

1.02. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Maintenance Stock: Supply extra 2% of total quantity of each tile used, including base tiles (but not special shapes). Place in clean, marked cartons and deliver to Owner for Owner’s maintenance use.

1.03. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and store on site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until

time of use.

B. Tile for each area shall come from the same shade and lot number.

1.04. JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintain minimum temperature limits (50°F) and installation practices as recommended by mortar

and grout materials manufacturer.

1.05. WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant that the installed system will be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fifteen (15) years from the date of Substantial Completion. The Manufacturer shall replace materials that have failed and reimburse the Owner for labor costs to remove failed products and install replacement products.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Ceramic paver tile, ceramic tile and quarry tile units provided shall be as noted on drawings.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin CERAMIC & QUARRY TILE 093013-1

2.02. TILE TRIM

A. Provide round out corner units or bullnose units at outside corners of tile base. At interior corners of tile base, provide inside cove units.

B. Colors and finish shall match adjacent tile.

C. Edge Bead at Transition to Carpet: Extruded aluminum, having a carpet-covering cap connected to a raised leg of height to match exposed face of tile, configured for mounting by way of an under-tile flange, such as “RENO-TK” by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish. For curved/radius tile edge transitions to carpet, use “RENO-TK-R”.

2.03. SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Waterproof / Crack Isolation Membrane: Mapelastic AquaDefense as manufactured by Mapei.

B. Setting Material: Kerabond/Keralastic System or Granirapid System as manufactured by Mapei.

C. Grout:

1. Floor Epoxy Grout: Kerapoxy IEG as manufactured by Mapei. 2. Floor Standard Grout: Ultracolor Plus as manufactured by Mapei. 3. Wall Grout: Ultracolor Plus as manufactured by Mapei.

D. Floor Patching/Leveling Compound: High strength thin setting leveling compound, free of cellulose and salts, intended for interior use:

1. “Levelplan” by Mapei.

E. Water: Clean and drinkable.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which tile work is to be installed. Perform slab

moisture tests, relative humidity tests, and other tests as required by setting and grouting materials manufacturers. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Level out floor, filling depressions with floor patching/leveling compound.

C. Except for shrinkage cracks, repair cracks in substrate. Extend patching fabric so that it will be under at least 3 tiles on each side of the crack.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. Floor Tile: Thin-set in accordance with ANSI Specification A-108.5 (Reference TCA detail F115, Dry-Set Mortar, Epoxy or Furan Grout).

B. Base for Floor Tile: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCA detail W243, Gypsum Board Dry-Set Mortar – with epoxy grout).

C. Ceramic Tile Walls in Food Preparation Areas: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCA detail W243, Gypsum Board Latex Dry-Set Mortar – with epoxy grout).

D. Ceramic Tile Walls in Toilet Rooms: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCA detail W243, Gypsum Board Latex Dry-Set Mortar – with dry-set grout).

OEMA-2014-107 093013-2 CERAMIC & QUARRY TILE Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

E. Ceramic Tile Accents in Customer Areas: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCA detail W243, Gypsum Board Latex Dry-Set Mortar – with dry-set grout).

F. Extent of Floor Tile: Extend to walls, under casework, fixtures and equipment.

G. Extent of Base: Install ceramic tile or quarry tile base, as scheduled, at the perimeters of all work of this Section except in the cooler and freezer, where stainless steel base will be furnished by the cooler manufacturer.

H. Uniformity of Color Variations: Set tile in each area using only tile from the same shade and lot number. Mix tiles from several boxes, and rotate the tiles to ensure a non-repeat appearance.

I. Alignment of Wall Joints: Align so as to give straight uniform grout lines, both horizontal and vertical.

J. Alignment of Floor Joints: Align so as to give straight uniform grout lines, both parallel and perpendicular to the walls. Align joints in base with joints in floor.

K. Minimum Tile Sizes: Lay out all tile work so as to avoid cuts less than one-half tile in size.

L. Control Joints: Control joints in substrates must be continued through tile work.

M. Door Frames: Rake out grout between ceramic wall tile and doorframes for installation of sealant under Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

N. Grout: 1. Use only unsanded grout for floors. 2. Sanded grout. Finish the grout even with bottom of cushion edges on tile. 3. Before grouting tile with dark grout, seal the tiles with a sealer recommended by the tile

manufacturer.

3.03. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning:

1. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Use neutral cleaner. Acid solutions NOT PERMITTED.

2. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.

B. Protection:

1. When recommended by the tile manufacturer, apply protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

2. Protect installed tile floors with kraft paper or other heavy covering during the construction period to prevent damage and wear.

3. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 3 days, preferably 7 days, after installation.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from all tile surfaces.

END 093013.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin CERAMIC & QUARRY TILE 093013-3


SECTION 095113 - LAY-IN CEILINGS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY A. Work Included In This Section Features:

1. Lay-in panel ceilings, including suspension systems and accessories. 2. Hangers for support of recessed light fixtures in acoustical ceilings as required.


1. Suspended gypsum board ceilings ........................................................ Section 092116. 2. HVAC registers, grills and ductwork .................................................... Mech. Specs. 3. Lights and other electrical items ........................................................... Elect. Drawings.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

erection of the selected systems.

B. Installation Standards: Comply with recommendations of current CISCA “Ceiling Systems Handbook” except as specified otherwise hereinafter. Maintain a copy of the handbook at the site for Architect’s inspection while work of this Section is being accomplished.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data from manufacturer’s brochures describing each product to be used.

C. Maintenance Stock: Deliver to site for future maintenance not less than 1 unopened bundle of lay-in ceiling units of each type.

1.04. JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver acoustical ceiling materials until spaces have been enclosed and made weather-tight

and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those to be maintained during final occupancy.

B. Do not install acoustical ceilings until work above lay-in ceilings, particularly mechanical and electrical work, has been completed, inspected and approved.

1.05. WARRANTIES

A. Ceiling Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard warranties that products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 10 years from date of purchase when subjected to the allowable conditions of temperature and humidity.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Metal Suspension System: 15/16 inch exposed face, rigid metal, interlocking cross tees and main tee runners with flush joints at intersections, complying with ASTM C 635. Provide matching wall angle

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin LAY-IN CEILINGS 095113-1

molding and all accessories for a complete system. See Drawings for specific systems and their locations.

1. System Duty Level: Provide suspension system duty level as required to support items penetrating ceilings, including light fixtures and HVAC outlets/inlets, to meet seismic design requirements, and as required by ASTM C 635.

2. Provide system components and accessories as required to meet seismic design category indicated.

3. Specialty Systems: “Compasso Curved” ceiling trim (height as noted on drawings) by USG or comparable equal products.

B. Tile & Panels: As noted on drawings.

C. Accessory Materials:

1. Sealer for Edge of Cut Tiles: As furnished by tile manufacturer, color to match tiles.

2. Hanger Wire: Pre-stretched, galvanized, soft-annealed mild steel wire conforming to ASTM A 641, 12-gauge.

3. Hanger Anchor Studs: Screws with deep throat threads having forged wire suspension eyelet, cadmium-plated; such as by I-Lag, tel: 805-523-9148, or Abesco's “Drop-Ceiling Anchor Screws” tel: 800-843-2738.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION

A. Verify that work above ceilings, particularly mechanical, electrical and firestopping work, has been completed, inspected and approved before beginning installation of acoustical ceiling panel system.

B. Installer shall be responsible for all conditions affecting proper installation of his materials and shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. INSTALLATION OF PANEL/TILE SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. General:

1. Install suspension systems in compliance with ASTM C 636. Space tee runners at 4'-0" centers and hang by direct suspension from structure above. Install interlocking cross tees to form 2ft x 2ft and 2ft. x 4ft grids as indicated.

a. Layout: Border units shall be equal in size at opposite walls and shall be at least 12" in width, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

b. Runners: Shall be straight, true to line, with exposed surfaces flush and level.

B. Suspension: Suspend main runners with wires placed 4'-0" o.c. Install wires plumb and free of kinks, attached by looping and wire-tying directly to eyelet anchor studs.

1. Suspend only from bottom of wood framing for roof structure. Do not suspend from gypsum board, bridging or suspended equipment (e.g. pipes and ducts).

2. Keep wires from touching ducts and pipes. Non-plumb wires shall be matched by countersloping wires or counterbracing.

3. Where the Drawings show a lay-in light fixture, support the ceiling suspension grid with hanger wires placed within 6" of each corner of the fixture.

C. Install perimeter supporting wall trim where border units abut walls or other vertical surfaces. Miter the joints at outside corners of walls.

OEMA-2014-107 095113-2 LAY-IN CEILINGS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

D. Properly seat grid members at all joint, including at perimeter supporting wall / closure trim. Pop rivets will not be permitted. Attach tees to perimeter supporting wall / closure trim, with manufacturer’s recommended clips designed for application.

3.03. INSTALLATION OF LAY-IN CEILING PANELS A. Install panels to bear equally and uniformly on the grid system on all four sides, with adjacent edges

parallel and equally spaced. Install panels with direction of mill pattern aligned in one direction. Panel faces shall form a true plane.

B. Hold-Down Clips: Anchor the panels with hold down clips when within 20ft of an exterior door. Clips shall be omitted where access to mechanical work in ceiling plenum above is required. Check Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for access locations.

C. Border panels shall fit the suspension grid and the wall angle such that panels will not skew or show voids.

D. When cutting border panels, rabbet the cut edge of the panel and seal the cut area with factory furnished sealer in color to match.

3.04. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of units and leave free of defects. Replace units that cannot be cleaned to factory-new condition.

B. Remove and replace units that are damaged, warped or improperly installed.

END 095113.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin LAY-IN CEILINGS 095113-3


SECTION 096518 – HYBRID CARPET


A. Work Included in this Section Features:

1. Preparation of surfaces to receive hybrid carpet. 2. Installation of hybrid carpet. 3. Vinyl base at perimeter walls. 4. Metal edge trim.


1. Concrete floor finishing.......................................................................... Section 033000. 2. Edging at ceramic tile ............................................................................. Section 093013.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain hybrid carpeting of each type and color from same production run and of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

1. Obtain components, including leveling and patching compounds, for hybrid carpeting system from the same manufacturer as hybrid carpeting or from a manufacturer approved by the hybrid carpeting manufacturer.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Hybrid carpet installation company shall be certified by hybrid carpet manufacturer and shall have at least satisfactory experience in the installation of the type specified. Only qualified and experienced hybrid carpet mechanics working under proper supervision shall be employed on the project.

C. Flammability Test Requirements: Provide only materials, including adhesives, which will produce an installation having the following properties:

1. Critical Radiant Flux of at least 0.45 watts per square centimeter, Class I, when tested according to ASTM E 648.

2. ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density (Smoke Generation) of 450 or less when tested according to ASTM E 662.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Certifications:

1. Include certified laboratory test report for flammability requirements. 2. Manufacturer shall submit certification that Installer is a factory approved installer.

C. Maintenance Supply:

1. Furnish additional hybrid carpet material for maintenance purposes equal to approximately 5% of hybrid carpet installed. Half of the material furnished shall be in pieces no less than 3 square yards. Of the remainder, no piece may be less than 1/2 square yard.

2. Package the hybrid carpet repair remnants neatly in wrapper suitable for preservation of hybrid carpet in long term storage. Deliver packaged remnants to building.

3. Furnish to the Owner in labeled boxes for future maintenance not less than 2% of wall base installed.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin HYBRID CARPET 096518-1

D. Maintenance Manuals:

1. Obtain from manufacturer and submit for Owner's use, 3 copies of manufacturer’s complete maintenance recommendations for hybrid carpet installed.

2. Obtain from the installers of hybrid carpet, and submit in Operations and Maintenance Manual for Owners use, 3 copies of all concrete slab testing specified herein and additionally required by hybrid carpet manufacturer. Clearly identify each test result and include accurate plans indicating where and when each test was taken.

1.04. PRODUCT STORAGE, DELIVERY & COORDINATION A. Delivery and installation of hybrid carpet shall be coordinated with completion schedule for the

various areas.

B. Hybrid carpet shall be stored away from construction activities and shall be protected against moisture, dust and vermin.

C. Installation shall not begin in any area until painting and ceiling work for that area have been completed.

1.05. WARRANTY

A. Provide all warranties standard to the manufacturer for the hybrid carpet selected.

B. Warranties shall start at an adjusted date if hybrid carpet is installed after the date of Substantial Completion.

2. PRODUCTS 2.01. MATERIALS

A. Hybrid carpet and vinyl base shall be provided as selected by Owner and as noted on drawings.

B. Wall Base at walls around Carpet: Vinyl complying with ASTM F 1861, Type TV (thermoplastic vinyl), Group 1 (solid homogeneous), Style B (coved), 6" high, minimum 0.080 inch thickness.

C. All hybrid carpet shall be manufactured at one time. All hybrid carpet shall be of a consistent construction throughout.

D. All accessories shall be as recommended by the hybrid carpet manufacturer.

E. Metal Edge Trim: Reno-TK (straight) & Reno-TK-R (curved) anodized aluminum by Schluter except as otherwise noted on drawings.

F. Adhesives:

1. Water based, strippable, waterproof type, VOC compliant, asbestos free, compatible with substrate and materials, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. For outside corners in vinyl base use contact cement.

3. EXECUTION 3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Before beginning work to lay new hybrid carpet, examine all surfaces over which work is to be applied. Verify that concrete finishes comply with requirements and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Report to the Architect in writing any surface defects and conditions that are unsuitable to receive work.

B. Testing: Hybrid carpet installer shall perform tests specified below so that test locations are evenly spaced within installation areas. Perform tests in areas where drying is most restricted but not closer

OEMA-2014-107 096518-2 HYBRID CARPET Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

than 5ft to a perimeter, performing at least 3 tests for the first 1,000 SF and an additional test for each additional 1,000 SF.

1. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

2. Alkalinity Test: ASTM F 710. Test concrete for pH and proceed with installation only after the pH of all tests is not less than 7 nor greater than 9.

3. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by hybrid carpet manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture meter readings and plastic mat test results will not be accepted as conclusive.

C. Verify that surfaces to receive vinyl base are free of sealers, oils and other bond inhibitors. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, salts, dusting, mold or mildew.

D. Starting of work shall be construed as acceptance of the suitability of the surfaces to receive work. Remove and replace at no charge to Owner all work under this Section which may require removal in order to correct defects caused by insufficient examination and preparation of the substrates.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Check the match of hybrid carpet rolls before cutting and ensure that there is no visible variations.

B. Clean and prepare to a satisfactory condition all surfaces scheduled to receive carpet.

C. Fill saw cut joints, construction joints, expansion joints, cracks and depressions in the slab with flexible vinyl filler as required to prevent show-through.

3.03. HYBRID CARPET INSTALLATION A. Install hybrid carpet using the RS System (Peel & Stick).

B. Lay hybrid carpet in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Lay hybrid carpet smooth and even, cut and fit evenly along all walls and around all projections. Continue hybrid carpet into recesses and under equipment and furnishings.

C. Edges at Other Floor Materials: Install edge strips at all exposed edges of hybrid carpet except where hybrid carpet meets ceramic/paver tile; in which case, secure the hybrid carpet edge with the edging provided with the tile. Edging shall be one continuous piece at doors and wherever standard lengths permit. Securely fasten edging to floors.

1. When hybrid carpet ends at a doorway and door swings over hybrid carpet, place hybrid carpet under door (but not beyond door) and finish hybrid carpet with nose of edge strip aligned with the edge of the stop on the door frame.

2. When hybrid carpet ends at doorway and door swings away from hybrid carpet, place hybrid carpet up to face of door and finish hybrid carpet with edge strip having its nose aligned with the edge of the stop on the door frame.

D. Workmanship: The completed hybrid carpet installation shall be free of ripples and puckers.

3.04. INSTALLATION OF VINYL BASE A. Install the coved base on top of hybrid carpet.

B. Install base in as long lengths as practicable. Do not stretch base to fill void spaces. Do not allow joints within 16" of corners and ends of runs.

C. Joints shall be tight, free of visible adhesive and adhesive residues. The tops and faces of pieces shall be flush across all joints.

D. Tightly bond the base to the wall throughout its length, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin HYBRID CARPET 096518-3

E. At outside corners, lightly V-cut the back of the base and secure to wall with contact cement.

3.05. PROTECTION

A. Protect hybrid carpet after installation against stains and accumulations of dust and debris.

3.06. CLEANUP

A. The completed installation shall be free of scraps, hybrid carpet ripples and puckers. Clean up all dirt and debris. Remove all spots with proper remover.

B. Damage: Repair any damage to existing paintwork, millwork, walls, doors, floors, etc., caused by hybrid carpet installation.

C. Upon completion of the installation remove all waste, excess materials, protective coverings, tools and equipment.

D. Carefully and thoroughly vacuum clean all new installed hybrid carpet to Owner's satisfaction. Do not begin vacuuming until perimeter resilient base has cured at least 10 days. When schedules allow, do not begin vacuuming until 14 days after installation of resilient base.

END 096518.

OEMA-2014-107 096518-4 HYBRID CARPET Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin


SECTION 099000 - PAINTING

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Surface preparation and painting of all interior exposed unfinished or shop primed items and surfaces.

2. Surface preparation and painting of all exterior exposed unfinished or shop primed items and surfaces including, but not limited to, hollow metal doors and frames, gate plastic/cedar boards and steel pipe bollards.

3. Touching up with sealant any dents, cracks or voids visible after application of primer. 4. Protection of surfaces not scheduled for painting; cleanup of paint spatters; protection of newly

painted surfaces.


1. Shop priming & touch up in the field ................................................................... Various Sects. 2. Steel pipe bollards ................................................................................................ Section 055000. 3. Wood trim plastic/cedar gate boards & removal of hardware trim for painting ... Section 062000. 4. Hollow metal doors & frames ............................................................................... Section 081113. 5. Gypsum board surfaces ......................................................................................... Section 092116. 6. Removal of electrical items prior to painted ......................................................... Elect. Sects.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide finish coats that are compatible with shop primers. Provide barrier coats over incompatible

primers or remove and reprime as required.

B. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed for execution of painting work.

C. Use paint materials only as directed by the manufacturer’s label on container.

D. Definitions and Terminology: The terms and definitions in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

E. Comply with Federal and State Regulations regarding VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) levels.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit all products to be used. List each material and cross-reference it to the specified paint and finish system and application. Identify by manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification.

C. Color Samples: When so requested, submit samples on portions of the work at the site, not less than 4ft x 4ft size.

D. Maintenance Supply: Deliver to Owner in unused quart containers 1 quart of each type and color of paint used on the Project. Mark each container with color and room names/exterior surfaces where paint was used, without obscuring manufacturer’s label.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin PAINTING 099000-1

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All paints, varnishes, enamels, stains, paste fillers and similar materials must be delivered in their

original containers, with the seals unbroken and labels intact.

B. Except as otherwise allowed by paint manufacturer’s written instructions, maintain temperature in storage areas between 50°F and 90°F.

1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply paint when the surface is damp, the room humidity

exceeds the manufacturer’s recommendations, or, for exterior paints, during rainy or frosty weather.

B. Protection: Protect painted work at all times and protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of painting work.

C. Remove oily rags, waste, etc., from the building at the end of each day’s work and take every precaution to avoid the danger of fire. Keep oily rags, etc. susceptible to spontaneous ignition, in water filled metal cans with tight lids or in FMRC-approved containers.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. MATERIALS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Paint materials shall be manufactured by Sherwin-Williams (basis of design), PPG, or Benjamin Moore.

B. Products: Manufacturer’s products listed hereinafter in the Painting Schedule represent types and grades required. Comparable products of other manufacturers listed in preceding paragraph will also be acceptable.

C. Grades: Materials not displaying the manufacturer’s identification as a best-grade product will not be acceptable.

D. Caulk: Paintable acrylic-latex sealant with 12-1/2% elongation.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. INSPECTION

A. Applicator must examine the areas and conditions under which painting work is to be done and shall notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

B. Verify that shop applied primers are compatible with specified finish coats.

C. Do not apply coatings to surfaces where electronic moisture meter indicates values above 12%.

D. Do not proceed with painting work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Starting of painting work will be construed as the Applicator’s acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within that particular area.

E. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed or crumbly surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a smooth, durable paint film, until those surfaces have been prepared as specified below.

F. All work where a coat of material has been applied must be inspected and approved by Owner’s representative before application of succeeding specified coat, otherwise no credit for the coat applied will be given and the work in question shall be recoated.

OEMA-2014-107 099000-2 PAINTING Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

3.02. SURFACE PREPARATION A. General:

1. Just before painting is started, clean all surfaces to be painted until free of substances that could impair bond of paints, including loose dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Remove incompatible primers or existing coats and reprime substrate with compatible primer or apply tie in coat as required to produce paint system indicated. Where existing painted surfaces are indicated to be repainted, clean / scrape surfaces to remove loose paint and sand edges of existing paint that remains so edges do not show through finish coats of paint.

2. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

3. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

B. Gypsum Board: Fill holes, nail holes, cracks, etc., after the first coat, with filler of a color to match that of the finish. Filler shall be brought flush with the adjoining surface, free of ridges and depressions.

C. Steel: Where rust or scale is present, wire brush, or sand clean before painting. Clean steel to SSPC level recommended by paint manufacturer. Shop coats of paint that are marred shall be cleaned and touched up with compatible primer.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

E. Cedar: Prior to stain application, perform water test per manufacturer’s recommendation. Do not apply stain until cedar absorbs water as necessary to indicate its ability to absorb stain.

F. Mildew and Mold: Remove with solution of detergent and tri-sodium phosphate or solution of detergent and bleach; and then rinse clean.

G. Caulking Touch-Up: After application of primer, fill-in with paintable caulk any dents, cracks and voids that appear, and make smooth.

1. Fill cracks between dissimilar materials such as between hollow metal doorframes and walls.

2. Seal top surfaces of exterior steel doors and wipe away excess sealant.

3.03. APPLICATION A. General:

1. Paint all exposed surfaces except where specified or noted as a surface not to be painted. 2. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar

materials or areas, unless directed otherwise. 3. Apply material only to dry, properly prepared surfaces. 4. Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate,

establishing a total dry film thickness for each coat as recommended by coating manufacturer. 5. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and smoothly flowed

on without runs or sags. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that on flat surfaces.

6. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coat. Doubling-back to establish additional coats shall not be allowed.

7. Tint undercoats to a shade slightly lighter than that of the succeeding coat.

B. Steel Doors:


1. Before finishing exterior hollow metal doors, apply sealant to seams in tops of doors and wipe off excess.

2. Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors, same as faces of doors. 3. Paint bottom channel of exterior hollow metal doors before they are hung.

C. Cedar Gate Boards: Apply finish to all surfaces of cedar gate boards prior to attachment to gate frame so all surfaces are equally sealed against moisture. Touch up finish as necessary after installation of boards.

D. Steel Deck Gate Facing: Apply finish to all surface of steel deck facing prior to attachment to gate frame so all surfaces are equally sealed against moisture. Touch up finish as necessary after installation of steel deck facing.

3.04. PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP A. Provide “Wet Paint” signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary

protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

B. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

C. Upon completion of the work, remove all paint and varnish spots from the floors, glass and other surfaces.

3.05. PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Paint all exposed interior surfaces except where the material is specifically noted below as a surface

not to be painted. Do not paint items such as, but not limited to:

1. Factory finished items, unless Owner indicates item is to be painted to match adjacent surfaces.

2. Finished Metal Surfaces: Bright or satin polished aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze.

3. Operating Parts: Valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts.

4. Labels: Code-required labels such as Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) labels, as well as equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.

B. Number of Coats Required: The number of coats listed in the following schedule is to be taken as a minimum. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.

C. Paint specification is based upon Sherwin-Williams (S-W) products. Comparable products of other manufacturers, listed as approved, may be used.

D. Exterior Surfaces:

1. Bonderized Hollow Metal Doors & Frames and Powder Coat Primed Handrails: 1 coat – S-W DTM Bonding Primer, B66A50, 2.0-5.0 mils DFT. 2 coats - S-W Hydrogloss Single Component, B65 Series, 2.0-4.0 mils DFT/ coat.

2. Galvanized Metal:

2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series, 2.5-4.0 mils DFT/ coat.

3. Canopy Anchorages: 1 coat – S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, 2.0-3.0 mils DFT 2 coats -S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series, 2.5-4.0 mils DFT.

4. PVC Gate / Fence Boards:

OEMA-2014-107 099000-4 PAINTING Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

1 coat – S-W Multi-Purpose Water Base Interior/ Exterior Primer/ Sealer, B51-450 Series, 1.4 mils DFT.

2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series, 2.5-4.0 mils DFT/ coat.

5. Concrete block: 1 coat – S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200, 8 mils DFT/coat applied for pinhole free

finish. 2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series, 2.5-4.0 mils DFT/ coat.

6. Cedar Gate / Fence Boards: 2 coats - S-W WoodScapes Polyurethane Stain, A15T5 Series.

E. Interior Surfaces: See Drawings

1. Gypsum Board Walls, Ceilings & Bulkheads:

1 coat - S-W Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600, 1.5 mils DFT. 2 coats - S-W Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20-2600 Series, 1.7 mils DFT/

coat.

2. Wood Trim & Millwork:

1 coat - Paste Wood Filler –Minwax. 1 coat - S-W Wood Classics 250 Interior Oil Stain, A49-800 Series. 2 coats - S-W Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish Gloss, A68 Series. 1 coat - S-W Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish Satin, A68 Series.

3. Ferrous Metal:

Shop prime coat, field touch-up. 2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series, 2.5-4.0 mils DFT/ coat.

4. Bonderized Hollow Metal Doors & Frames: 1 coat – S-W DTM Bonding Primer, B66A50, 2.0-5.0 mils DFT. 2 coats - S-W Hydrogloss Single Component, B65 Series, 2.0-4.0 mils DFT/ coat.

END 099000.


DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

SECTION 102113.19 –PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Floor supported overhead braced plastic partitions. 2. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures. 3. Partition mounted toilet accessories specified herein. 4. Installation of toilet accessories specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5. Installation of toilet accessories provided by Owner.


1. Ceramic tile floors and walls ......................................................................... Section 093013. 2. Rough Carpentry for blocking ....................................................................... Section 061000.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors, fastenings and other components.

C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

2. Show locations of anchorages, hardware and reinforcements for attachment of toilet accessories.

3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

4. Show overhead bracing locations.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit samples of toilet compartment material, minimum size 2 inch by 4 inch, showing each of manufacturer’s standard colors and textures, for selection by Owner.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.

F. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.

1.04. PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver toilet compartments wrapped in manufacturer’s original packaging.

B. Store in dry, enclosed building in manner recommended by compartment manufacturer to protect against warping or other damage. Protect from excessive heat.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19-1

1.05. COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Do not begin installation until:

1. Wall finishes are completed and have cured. 2. Floor finishes are completed, cured and are approved for traffic.

1.06. WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under prevailing local laws or other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other remedies and warranties including those made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of toilet compartments that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Breaking of any component. b. Corrosion of any component. c. Separation or delamination of finish from substrate. d. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 48-inch section.

2. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 and with the State of Wisconsin Accessibility Code for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.02. SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Manufacturer: Accurate Partitions Corporation.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced floor anchored.

C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. Provide manufacturer’s standard pebble or orange peel texture.

1. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion.

2. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as indicated on drawings.

D. Pilaster Mounting and Shoes: Partitions shall be anchored to floor by stainless steel mounting bar attached to bottom of pilaster. Mounting bar shall be anchored to floor with corrosion resistant bolts. Floor anchoring system shall be concealed by manufacturer's standard stainless steel shoe design with #4 finish.

OEMA-2014-107 102113.19-2 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

1. Pilasters adjacent to walls and less than 2-1/2 inches wide shall be designed so doors will be even with the bottom of the pilasters, without protruding hardware.

E. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. Each bracket shall have a minimum of six (6) through bolt panel attachments.

2.03. HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Chrome-plated zamac.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at all compartments.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Provide one at each door.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors that swing against toilet compartments. Mount on door.

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch thick stainless-steel continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts.

C. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Torx drive without center pin not allowed. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.

1. Anchors into walls shall be capable of developing FULL strength of brackets without pulling out from wall.

2. No plastic expansion anchors allowed.

2.04. MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584.

D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

F. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

G. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.


2.05. FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation, including overhead braces.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. No evidence of drilling, cutting or patching shall be visible in the finished work.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 3/4 inch.

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with brackets the full height of the panel.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. c. Pilasters adjacent to walls and less than 2-1/2 inches wide shall be anchored to wall (not

at floor) and overhead brace. d. Anchor only to solid wood blocking. No plastic expansion anchors allowed.

3. Set doors with uniform clearance at strike pilaster, not to exceed 3/16 inch top to bottom when latched.

4. Coat Hook Bumper:

a. Install one on the stall side of each door, centered in door, at height approved on Shop Drawings.

b. At accessible stall, hook shall be at 48” above finish floor, unless noted otherwise.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Accessories: Drill and cut holes in partitions for installation of surface mounted accessories furnished by Owner.

1. Toilet Paper Holders: Mount back to back except as required otherwise, using chrome plated screws. Center of holder shall be 2'-4" from rear wall and top shall be 36" above floor, except

OEMA-2014-107 102113.19-4 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

that in stalls for the handicapped, center of holder shall be 2'-10" from rear wall and top shall be immediately below grab bar.

2. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Units: Mount back to back except as required otherwise, using chrome plated screws. Units shall be adjacent to the toilet tissue holder, towards the compartment door, with the top 36" above floor.

3. Grab Bars: Install partition mounted grab bars for mounting on partitions. Carefully mount to partitions, as shown on the Drawings, reinforcing as necessary for the strongest, most durable installation.

3.03. ADJUSTMENT, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

B. Protect units after erection so that there will be no indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance. Replace damaged work as directed.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings and accessories, including any marks made on walls and partitions to establish alignment.

D. Repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the Owner, damage to compartment components, using materials and methods recommended by the partition manufacturer.

E. Damage to floor and wall finishes shall be repaired or touched up by the partition installer, using the installer of the finish. Touching up and repairing of finishes shall be done without additional charge to the Owner.

END 102113.19.


DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

SECTION 104400 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES



1. Fire extinguisher cabinets, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets.


1. Gypsum board openings and framing ..................................................... Section 092116.

1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards:

1. Fire extinguishers shall comply with and be located in accordance with the Wisconsin Accessibility Code and Americans with Disabilities Architectural (ADA) Guidelines.

2. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Certifications: Fire extinguishers shall be delivered with certification denoting that they have been inspected for serviceability by a certified fire equipment inspector within the previous 30 days.

C. Coordination: Coordinate size of fire extinguisher cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguisher indicated are accommodated.

1.03. SUBMITTALS A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”

B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of unit specified. Indicate rough opening sizes, anchorages, hardware and accessory items.

C. Samples: Submit samples of lettering for cabinet front and signage. Indicate text, letter style, size, color and location.

2. PRODUCTS 2.01. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Acceptable Models & Manufacturers:

1. FEC-1:

a. Architectural Series Model No. 2409-6R (Non-Rated) by Larsen’s Manufacturing. b. Ambassador Model No. 1017 (Non-Rated) by J. L. Industries.

B. Cabinet Construction:

1. Cabinet Box: Cold rolled steel with baked enamel finish (white color) inside and outside. Inside dimensions approximately 9-1/2"W x 24"H x 6"D.

2. Hinges: Recessed or continuous.

3. Door: Steel panel with full-height, vertical, duo type frame with clear tempered float glass, baked enamel finish, white color.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES 104400-1

4. Door Handle: Applied type, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s options, including factory finish.

a. Provide recessed pull where required to comply with Americans with Disabilities Architectural (ADA) Guidelines.

5. Door Frame: Rolled edge trim design, of steel, factory baked enamel, white color.

6. Identification: Cabinet shall bear the words “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” written vertically, with upright letters stacked on top of each other, on metal part of door panel in manufacturer’s standard typeface selected by Architect. Words shall be in red letters.

C. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel bracket, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated finish.

a. Identification: With lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location, identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. Architect to determine orientation of lettering.

2.02. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Types:

1. For FE-1: (mounted on bracket in cooking areas and in fire extinguisher cabinet in dining area)

a. 10 lbs capacity, multi-purpose dry chemical type for A/B/C Class fires, U.L. listed, fully pressurized, with sight gauge, factory charged:

1) Larsen’s Manufacturing: MP10 Series, 4A-80B:C. 2) J. L. Industries: Cosmic 10E, UL4A-80B:C.

2. For FE-2 (mounted on bracket in cooking areas):

a. Wet chemical, 6 liter capacity, type for K Class fire, U.L. listed, fully pressurized, with sight gauge, factory charged.

1) Larsen’s Manufacturing: WC-6L (K Class). 2) J. L. Industries: Saturn 15, Class K, UL Rating K.

B. Placard: Include rigid, permanent sign for mounting next to fire extinguisher stating that extinguisher shall not be used until fire suppression system has been activated.

C. Serviceability Inspection: Within 30 days prior to delivery to site, each fire extinguisher shall have been inspected for serviceability by a certified fire equipment inspector and shall bear the inspector’s current tag or equivalent mark upon delivery.

D. Quantities: Furnish 1 fire extinguisher for each fire extinguisher cabinet.

3. EXECUTION 3.01. INSTALLATION

A. General: Install units in accordance with details on Drawings and recommendation of manufacturer.

B. Mounting Heights: Locate top of cabinet as shown on Drawings or as otherwise required by accessibility code standards listed above.

END 104400.

OEMA-2014-107 104400-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING

1. GENERAL

A. Scope of Work

1. The true intent of the project is to provide for the construction, execution, and completion in every detail of a complete work or improvement which the contractor undertakes to do in full compliance with the plans, specifications, special provisions in accordance with recognized engineering principles. The contractor shall perform all items of work covered and stipulated herewith in accordance with the lines, grades, typical sections, and dimensions given and shall furnish all material, implements, machinery, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, electric power and labor necessary to the prosecution and completion of the work.

2. The contractor shall at all times keep the site of the work, including all private or

public property involved in or adjacent to the work free from any rubbish, surplus or waste materials that have been deposited by his employees or which have accumulated as a result of the work.

3. It is the responsibility of the contractor to acquaint himself with the location of

all underground structures which may be encountered or which may be affected by the work.

4. All fees and charges assessed by water and sewer utilities shall be paid by the General

Contractor.

5. It is the intent of the Engineer/Architect to indicate on the plans the existing sewers, water and gas mains, electric and telephone cables and other subsurface structures to the extent that records of these substructures are available. However, if any plans are different in location or elevation from those shown on the plans, the Engineer/Architect shall not be liable for any extra expense involved due to such omissions or changed location except where actual interference of subsurface structures with the location of the proposed sewers necessitates a change in the sewer plans which will entail extra expense. This extra expense will not be paid for unless the contractor has received an extra work order for doing the work.

6. Provide an as-built drawing showing location (with dimensions) and depth of all

underground and concealed pipe. As-built drawing shall be kept at job site office until project is complete. At such time it shall be given to the Owner.

B. Any and/or all of the following documents that are applicable are to be considered to be

part of the specifications for this contract.

1. Wisconsin Administrative Code.

2. City of Janesville, Wisconsin requirements.

2. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. Interior Services

1. General

a. Keep pipe clean and free of backfill and other construction materials. Cap or seal ends of all lines until construction is complete.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin PLUMBING 220000-1

b. Water lines shall be pressure tested and approved by the

Engineer/Architect and/or local inspector prior to backfilling. Provide written record of time and result of test.

c. Pipe sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through new masonry or

concrete walls or floors.

d. Coordinate the location of sleeves, openings, chases, furred spaces, etc., with the other contractors. Provide all sleeves, hangers, and inserts that are to be built into the structure during the progress of construction.

e. Pipe sleeves shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe and shall extend

completely through the construction.

f. Sleeves for pipe 4" and smaller shall be at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through. Sleeves for pipe larger than 4" shall be at least 1 pipe size larger than pipe passing through. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be 1" larger in diameter than the insulated pipe.

g. Sleeves shall extend 3/8" above the finish floor. In mechanical rooms and

other areas where water may accumulate, sleeves shall extend 2" above the finish floor.

h. Grout openings through concrete or masonry, including space between

sleeves and walls or floors, with Dow 8640 or 8641 sealant.

i. Pack annular space between sleeves and insulation or pipe or ductwork with fiberglass.

j. Provide offset and transition fittings as required.

2. Openings in Fire-Rated Construction: Penetration of required fire-resistive rated

floor, wall, ceiling and roof assemblies by plumbing components shall be in accordance with one of the following:

a. A device or system tested and listed by an approved testing laboratory.

b. Assemblies detailed in Gypsum Association Manual GA-600.

c. An approved method of calculation in lieu of approved test.

3. Water Piping

a. Copper tube above ground: Type "L", hard temper, ASTM B42 and B88. Wrought copper sweat fittings and non-corrosive, lead-free, tin antimony solder.

b. Copper tube underground: Type "K" soft ASTM B42 and B88 with

silver soldered.

c. Valves - NIBCO bronze ball, or equal.

d. Connect all water lines to each fixture and install all required piping as shown on the drawings. Provide chrome finished metal escutcheon at pipe penetrations.

e. Test water piping before connecting fixtures with hydrostatic pressure of

100 psi without loss of pressure for at least 2 hours (interior). Comply with

OEMA-2014-107 220000-2 PLUMBING Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

local ordinances. Provide the Engineer/Architect with results of test.

f. Disinfection - Provide chlorine disinfection. Other approved disinfection methods may be used with prior approval of the Engineer/Architect and local authorities.

g. Water supply risers shall terminate with an air chamber where required.

Water supply pipes serving fixtures and equipment shall terminate with an air chamber where required.

h. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections where joining dissimilar metals.

i. Underslab connections are prohibited.

j. Provide access panels where valves are not exposed.

k. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment.

l. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves.

4. Hot Water Return Piping and Filtered Water

a. PEX (Engel) tubing, fittings and additional components as required. PEX

tubing uses a process called the Engel Method to change high density polyethylene to cross-linked polyethylene (PEX). Engel Method PEX is cross-linked during the manufacturing process using heat and high pressure. The result is an extremely uniform product with high temperature, pressure and chemical resistance.

b. PEX tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/ASTM F877 as certified by Hauser

Laboratories and NSF International.

c. PEX tubing carries the following maximum pressure/ temperature ratings: - 160 psi at 73.4oF. - 100 psi at 180oF. - 80 psi at 200oF.

d. Cold expansion brass fittings with PEX reinforced rings to be manufactured to

ASTM 1960 and have third party listing.

e. The PEX tubing system must meet all of the following requirements:

1. Approval for the installation of the PEX system must be obtained from the proper administrative authority prior to installation.

2. The system must be installed by a plumber trained by the

manufacturer of the particular PEX system to be installed.

3. All components must be part of one specific PEX manufacturer’s system, and must bear the identification mark of that manufacturer. The PEX system must have IAPMO and NSF approval and marking of IAPMO approval must be stamped on tubing and fittings.

4. The installation must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

installation guidelines.

5. Pipe Insulation


a. Preformed closed cell - Rubatex R-180-FS insulation, or equal. 3/4" wall thickness (R 3.6 minimum) on hot water supply and hot water return above and below floor slab. 1/2" wall thickness (R 1.9 minimum) on cold water supply above floor slab.

b. Water and drain pipes under lavatories shall be insulated as follows:

1. Open vanities shall be Truebro, Inc. "Handi Basin-Guard"

undersink enclosure or 1/2" oak plywood stained to match cabinets.

2. Wall mounted lavatories shall be fully molded.

a. Truebro, Inc. "HandiLav-Guard" Insulation Kit, Model #102

or #103 (for offset traps) in white.

b. Brocar Products, "Trap Wrap" Kit #500R or #500HS (for offset traps).

c. McGuire Products, "Pro Wrap" Kit #PW2000 or PW2000WC (for offset traps) for supply and waste lines.

c. Seal ends and joints of insulation with approved joint compound.

6. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping

a. PVC above ground: ASTM designations D1785, D2665 and F891.

b. PVC underground: ASTM designations D1785, D2665 and F891.

c. Connect all soil, waste and vent lines to each fixture and install all required piping as shown on the drawings. Provide chrome finished metal escutcheon at pipe penetrations.

d. Grade all soil and waste horizontal lines with a minimum of 1/8" per foot.

All vent pipe shall be sloped for complete drainage by gravity to soil or waste pipes.

e. Water test drainage system with a minimum of 10' head for 2 hours without

loss of water.

f. All soil and vent pipes passing through roof shall be provided with sheet lead weighing not less than 4 lbs. per square foot or other approved frostproof vent terminals.

g. When running a sewer under a footing, disturb as little of the soil under the

footings as possible. Provide concrete fill under all footings where excavations wider than 18" are required.

7. PVC Storm Piping: ASTM designations D1785, D2665, D3034 and F891.

8. PVC Soda Line Conduit:

a. ASTM D1785, D2665, F891.

b. Pressure test to be watertight.

3. EXECUTION

A. Piping arrangements shown are to express general design intent. Alternate arrangements will be considered provided they meet all applicable codes and contractor obtains approval

OEMA-2014-107 220000-4 PLUMBING Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

of proposed revisions. B. Structural members whose strength is impaired by improper cutting, drilling or

excessive defects shall be replaced or reinforced in a manner acceptable to the Engineer/Architect.

1. Studs may be notched 1/4 their depth to receive piping or conduit, or may be

drilled a maximum of 1 1/4" in 4" stud or 2" in 6" stud.

2. When plates are cut more than 1/2 their width for piping or ductwork, reinforce with 18 gauge steel straps.

3. No cutting or notching permitted in roof trusses.

END OF SECTION 220000


DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

SECTION 224200- FIXTURES

1. GENERAL

A. Provide 4 copies of shop drawings to the Engineer/Architect for approval.

B. All fixtures shall be equipped with traps and with stops on each supply.

2. MATERIALS

A. China and enameled fixtures: Briggs, American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, Crane, Mansfield, Gerber, Universal Rundle or equals are acceptable.

B. Sinks: Dayton, Elkay, Brass-Craft (Carlton), Polarware, Gerber, Mansfield, American

Standard or equals are acceptable.

C. Faucets and fittings: Moen, American Standard, Kohler, Bradley, Crane, Eljer, Delta, Valley, Mansfield, or equals are acceptable.

D. Fixture Description

1. Water closet (WC-1): Mansfield Quantum 147-123 floor mounted pressure assist

tank closet using 1.6 gpf; vitreous china, elongated front, china caps and white open front seat, Bemis 1955C.

2. Water closet (WC-2): Mansfield Quantum 148-123 universal height, floor

mounted pressure assist tank closet using 1.6 gpf; vitreous china, elongated front, china caps and white open front seat, Bemis 1955C. Flush control shall be located on the open side of the water closet, Model 45 or 49.

3. Urinal (UR-1): American Standard Trimbrook vitreous china washout flush action using 1.0GPF.

Electronic – hard wire flush valve: Sloan Royal 186-1.0 ES-S TMO with EL-518-A positioning and support kit.

4. Vanity tops (L-1): Wilsonart solid surface, with integral BV-1512 sink bowl to be

provided by the General Contractor. Sloan Optima Plus Electronic-hard wire: ETF-600-B electronic tempered faucet with BDM Mechanical mixing valve and cast brass chrome offset strainer and P-trap.

5. Laundry unit (LU-1): Oatey #38892, include 2" drain.

6. Slop sink (JMB-1): Molded crushed stone in polyester resin mop service sink.

Mustee Model #63M. Include #782-VB Chicago faucet with Watts 8AC vacuum breaker- backflow preventer and hose.

7. Floor drains (FD-1): Concrete floors. Sioux Chief 832-PNR series standard

complete assembly with rough-in drain and polished metal ring and strainer. No substitutions.

8. Floor sink (FS-1): Smith 3101 with sediment bucket and 3/4 grate.

9. Grease trap: 1,500 gallon capacity precast concrete with two maintenance access ways and locking covers.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin 224200-1 FIXTURES

10. Roof drain (RD-1): Smith #1015Y04-R-C-AD cast iron body, sump receiver,

under deck clamp and aluminum dome. 11. Wall hydrant (HB-1): Woodford Model 67 backflow protected, automatic

draining freezeless hydrant. Roof hydrant (HB-2): Woodford Model RHY2-MS backflow protected,

automatic draining freezeless hydrant.

12. Plumbing contractor to install the following Owner supplied equipment: 7 Work Sink

12 Waste Oil Recovery System 19 Hand Wash Sink 20 Wash Sink 20 Rinse Sink 20 Sanitize Sink

22/23 Pre-Wash 25 Public Dishwasher 26 Booster Heater 30 Eye Wash Station 33 Smart Cart 66 Ice Machine 67 Prep. Sink 75 Custard Dipping 84 Coffee Maker 85 Hot Chocolate Maker

97/104 Drink Dispenser - Soda 98 Iced Tea Brewer

100 Fountain Wash Sink Cuno Filter Booster Pump

13. Supplies, stops and traps: All exposed water and waste piping, valves, traps and escutcheons in connection with fixtures shall be brass, heavily chrome plated. All piping at walls shall have wall plates.

14. Cleanouts

a. In floors: Sioux Chief 834-ANR series complete assembly with rough-in

cleanout and round polished metal ring and cover. No substitutions.

In walls: Sioux Chief 20 gauge stainless steel wall plates.

b. Provide cleanout plug at base of each drain stack and each change of direction of drain line. Install flush with floor.

15. Water Meters: Shall meet the approval of the water department and complying

with AWWA Specifications, size as shown on the drawings. Meters are furnished by municipality. Contractors to provide fittings.

16. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: Watts Series 909 QT-S-2"M1.

17. Hot Water Temperature Control Valve: Watts Series 1170.

E. Plumbing Equipment

OEMA-2014-107 224200-2 FIXTURES Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

1. Gas water heater: Phoenix PH130-80 sealed combustion, 80 gallon storage, 44,000- 130,000 BTU/hr. input modulation as manufactured by Heat Transfer Products. Provide with 2" concentric sidewall vent kit and 6 year extended warranty.

2. Thermal expansion tank: Flexcon WH-18 4.5 gallon potable water expansion tank with 3/4” diameter tap.

3. Hot water return pump: Laing Model SMT-303-B, 1/150 HP, 115 volt single phase, 2

GPM against 5' head. Include time clock.

4. Water softener: Hellenbrand Model TS-90-1.5 with metered regeneration control.

5. Eye wash accessories: Powers ES150 BMN50W tempering mixing valve meeting ASSE 1071 and Watts U5B or U5BLP pressure reducing valves for hot and cold supply inlets.

3. EXECUTION

A. All fixtures shall be securely fastened to wall or floor construction. All fixtures and

accessory trim shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Mount sill cocks 18” above grade, with valve seat on warm side of insulation.

C. Install hot water heater and water softener.


OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin 224200-3 FIXTURES

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

SECTION 230000 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

1. GENERAL

A. Submit 4 copies of shop drawings to the Engineer/Architect for approval.

B. Forced air heating drawings and details are diagrammatic and are intended to show the intent of

the specifications. The contractor shall make full allowance to cover such contingencies as actual length and routing of ductwork, equipment locations, etc. He shall take all necessary measurements and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General Contractor for exact location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Drawings and specifications are intended to represent a complete job. Inclusion in either the specifications or drawings or required by state and local regulations implies inclusion in the required work.

Prior to submitting his bid, bidder shall call attention of the Engineer/Architect to any material or apparatus he believes to be inadequate or to any necessary items or work omitted. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to interpret his own drawings and specifications to insure that the installation conforms to his intent. Failure of the contractor to acquaint himself with existing conditions at the site shall in no way relieve the contractor of the responsibility for making installation in conformance with drawings and specifications without additional cost to the Owner.

C. Scope of Work

Provide complete heating and ventilating system where shown on the drawings as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Rooftop heating and air conditioning units including direct-expansion cooling sections,

operating controls and safety controls, fans, motors, compressors, filters, refrigeration piping, controls and related equipment.

2. Air distribution system including supply, return and fresh air ductwork with grilles,

diffusers, registers, louvers and related items.

3. Exhaust systems including fans, motors, backdraft dampers and operators, registers, louvers, grilles, controls, grease guards and related items. Exhaust hoods over deep fryers, griddle and dishwasher are furnished and installed by the HVAC contractor.

4. Temperature control systems including thermostats, time clocks, wiring and relays,

dampers and operators and related items.

5. Ductwork insulation including thermal and acoustical and related items.

6. Testing and balancing of air delivery systems.

D. Codes, Permits and Inspection Fees

1. All work and materials shall conform in every respect to the current rules and requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, National and State Electrical Codes, Local Codes and Ordinances, Local Utility Regulations and OSHA. Use only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel familiar with equipment required and manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation.

2. Give to the proper authorities all required notices relating to the project, obtain all

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000-1

official permits and licenses required, pay all fees incidental thereto, deliver upon completion of the work and without cost to the Owner all required certificates of inspection and approval.

E. Intent

1. Make the Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between the drawings and/or

existing conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate discrepancies through minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.

2. It is the intent of these specifications that the contractor shall provide all the necessary

material, apparatus and devices to complete the installation as specified herein, except such parts as are specifically excepted. If any item is either shown on the drawings or called for in these specifications, it shall be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in this contract.

3. Material and labor shall be first class and workmanlike and to the satisfaction of the

Engineer/Architect and shall be subject to his inspection test and approval at all times from commencement until the acceptance of completed work.

4. Manufacturers shall be responsible for providing material listed by UL or other

approved agencies, and all governing codes and ordinances. All material must bear UL and/or other approved labels where possible. Items specified by catalog number or brand name and approval of shop drawings will not relieve the manufacturer of this responsibility.

F. Manual

1. Upon completion of this portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver

to the Engineer/ Architect, 4 bound copies of an operation and maintenance manual compiled in accordance with the provisions of Special Conditions, Article 19 of these specifications.

Include with each manual:

a. Copy of the approved Record Documents for this portion of the work.

b. Copies of all warranties and guarantees.

2. MATERIALS

A. Roof Top Air Handling Units

1. Fully assembled and wired single zone gas heating and electric cooling of the size and capacity shown on the drawings. Units shall be AGA certified and ARI rated. All units shall be by the same manufacturer.

Accepted Manufacturers: Lennox Energence Series..

2. Compressor: Welded, fully hermetic compressor with vibration isolation.

Motor/compressor units shall be warranted for 5 years (non-pro-rated). Safety Controls: Low pressure, motor overload, crankcase heaters, freezestat and lockout circuit for restart.

3. Casing and Frame: Welded construction constructed of galvanized steel bonderized and

coated with baked enamel finish. Units shall be suitable for rooftop mounting, weatherproof, insulated casing and curb.

4. Coils: Indoor coils are direct-expansion type, non-ferrous construction with aluminum fins and copper tube. Outdoor coils are aluminum finish and aluminum tubes.

OEMA-2014-107 230000-2 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin

5. Fans and Motors: Indoor supply fan shall be double inlet forward-curved centrifugal fan with direct-drive or belt-drive motor. Outdoor fan shall be propeller type, direct-drive motor for vertical discharge.

6. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel construction, sectionalized design. Burners shall be

slotted-port type, stainless steel, natural draft venting. 10 year warranty on heat exchanger.

7. Controls: Furnish AGA approved gas controls to meet state and local codes. All

operating and safety controls required are to be supplied by equipment manufacturer, including programmable heat/cool thermostat for automatic changeover. Gas train to include gas valve for main burner, redundant safety gas valve, intermittent spark ignition system and high temperature. Limit switch.

8. Accessories:

a. Roof curb - field installed.

b. Integrated enthalpy economizer with hood – factory installed.

c. Throwaway filters during construction - field installed.

9. Smoke Detector: Provide factory installed in-duct smoke detector.

B. Thermostats: Single zone programmable commercial thermostats - 7 day programming with multiple occupied/unoccupied periods per day and a 3 hour override, ventilation and fan control, 2 stage heating and 2 stage cooling - Honeywell T7350 or equal.

C. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fan: Centrifugal, belt or direct driven as per schedule on drawings,

aluminum construction with centrifugal blower fan and spun inlet venture. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Drive assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolator. Drive assembly and wheel shall be removable without dismantling unit. Unit shall be AMCA certified.

D. Ceiling Exhaust Fans: Fans shall have centrifugal blower, inlet grille and gravity backdraft

damper. Fan shall be AMCA certified with a sound rating of 4.5 sones or less. Housing shall be insulated with 1/2" acoustic insulation.

E. Roof Top Air Handling Units Control:

1. Occupied Cycle: Supply fan will run continuous with fresh air damper open to

minimum position. Gas burner shall be activated upon heat demand. Cooling demand will activate first stage economizer control with second and third cooling stages sequenced with economizer operation.

2. Unoccupied Cycle: Outside air damper will close. Fan will cycle with demand for

cooling or heating with burner control.

F. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers:

1. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be suitable and compatible with ceiling construction in which they are installed. Review architectural schedules for compliance. Coordinate locations with reflected ceiling plan.

G. Natural Gas Fuel System:

1. Gas piping - 2" and Smaller

a. ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight (Schedule 40) black steel pipe with ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 Class 150 black malleable iron threaded fittings.


b. ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon

steel weld fittings.

2. Unions and Flanges - 2" and Smaller

ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use unions of pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for fittings of respective piping service but not less than 250 PSI.

3. Gas Valves

a. Crane, Walworth, Jenkins, Nibco, Milwaukee or Southern Manufacturing

Company are acceptable manufacturers.

b. 1/2" to 4": Southern Manufacturing Company Fig. 425 gas valve, cast iron body, screwed or flanged ends, bronze bearings, bronze plug and resilient seal ring for drop tight shutoff to 175 PSIG working pressure.

4. Gas Pressure Regulators

a. Fisher or Kunkle are acceptable manufacturers.

b. Regulators shall reduce pressure as noted on the plans.

c. 3/4" to 1-1/4": Fisher HSR direct-operated, spring-loaded regulator.

d. 1-1/2" to 2": Fisher CS400 direct-operated, spring-loaded regulator..

5. Service

a. Contractor shall arrange for the local gas utility to install a new gas meter, sized to deliver 2 psig natural gas (quantity shown on the drawings) at 1,000 BTU per cubic foot heat content.

b. Contractor shall pay for all gas service and meter charges levied by the

utility company.

6. Leak Tests

a. Test piping to 100 lbs. pressure for 48 hours with no loss of pressure. Test in accordance with gas utility. Provide the Engineer/Architect with copy of test.

b. Gradually increase pressure to not more than 1/2 of test pressure; then increase

pressure in steps of approximately 1/10 of test pressure until required test pressure is reached. Examine joints and connections with soap bubble solution or equivalent method. Piping system shall show no evidence of leaking.

3. EXECUTION

A. Material on Site and Storage

The contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and storage of material and equipment on site. Any material damaged by rust, corrosion, warping, breakage, finish damage, etc., shall be replaced by the contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect.

B. Cooperation/Coordination

1. The contractor is required to coordinate and cooperate with other contractors by


scheduling and installing his work as the construction progresses. Any deviation from contract plans shall be approved by the Engineer/Architect before proceeding.

2. The contractor is expected to study the plans of other trades and to fit his work into the

work of others in a coordinated manner. He shall lay out his work and be responsible for his own measurements. He shall check facilities provided by others which require electrical connections and provide outlets suitably located for them. He shall take such measurements as may be necessary to assure approved fitting and proper installation of his work and all other work depending thereon.

3. The contractor shall cooperate with other contractors to avoid complications between

the installation of heating and ventilating equipment and equipment installed by others.

C. Basic Materials

1. Where certain items are specified by manufacturer or trade names, the contractor's bid shall be based on the use of the named item. Where one make is described and others listed, comparable models of the other named equipment may be used.

2. The contractor shall provide materials and equipment of the type for which there are

National Board of Fire Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listings or approved equal and label services available.

3. All materials used for the heating and ventilating installation shall be new and unused

except as otherwise indicated, and shall be uniform in type and manufacture for the entire installation.

4. All materials shall be suitable for the conditions and duties imposed upon them in

service and shall be the latest standard catalog products of reputable manufacturers.

D. Approval of Substitutions

1. It is the intent that the heating and ventilating contractor shall base his proposal upon furnishing and installing materials as specified. In case the successful bidder wishes to substitute on manufacturer and/or catalog number, such substitutions shall be reviewed and discussed with the Engineer/Architect. NO substitutions will be considered unless product substituted shall benefit the Owner in appearance, operation, efficiency and cost. Further substitutions shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.

E. Guarantee

1. This contractor acknowledges his acquaintance with these specifications and the

respective requirements. He guarantees that the heating and ventilating system has been installed strictly in accordance with the heating and ventilating drawings and specifications, using only the best of materials available, installed in a substantial manner by experienced labor.

2. The contractor by acceptance of this contract guarantees all labor and materials provided

hereunder and shall at his expense repair, remodel, rebuild, replace and/or require and further make good and acceptable all labor and materials within one year from date of final acceptance.

F. Electrical Work

1. Electrical service to all major equipment will be provided by the electrical contractor.

These services will be installed complete with required line wiring, starters and disconnect switches to all pumps, fans, compressors, etc. and to the main control terminals, only of "package" wired equipment.


2. Low voltage control wiring within such package equipment, and all remote control,

sensing and/or interlock wiring including the control and sensing devices (P.E., E.P., float, flow pressure or thermo switches, valve and dampers operators, etc.) is the responsibility of this contractor, except where specifically noted. Line voltage control wiring by the electrical contractor.

3. All starters and disconnects shall be by the electrical contractor except

where specifically indicated otherwise. "Package Equipment".

4. All motors shall comply with NEMA, AIEE and ASA requirements. Coil capacitor start.

G. Lubrication

1. Lubricate all mechanical equipment under this contract and adjust before it is placed in

operation. Keep equipment lubricated until building is accepted.

2. Do not operate equipment which includes filters without the filters in place.

H. Housekeeping and Cleanup

1. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by employees or work, and at completion of work or more often as necessary, remove rubbish from and about the building. At completion, remove tools, scaffolding and surplus materials and leave his work "broom clean" or its equivalent, unless more exactly specified.

2. Clean grilles, diffusers and equipment, removing stains, paint, dirt, dust and temporary

labels or protections.

3. At no time shall any rubbish be thrown from windows or other parts of the building. See Supplementary General Conditions on use of fires on premises. In case of dispute, Owner may remove rubbish or clean and charge cost to several contracts as Engineer/Architect may determine just.

I. Testing and Adjusting

1. Test and adjust each piece of equipment and each system as required to assure proper

balance and operation.

a. Test and regulate ventilation and air conditioning systems to conform to the air volumes shown on the approved design drawings in accordance with the latest edition of the Associated Air Balance Council procedural standards by an independent TAB contractor. Submit 3 copies of final report for approval.

b. Make tests and adjustments in apparatus and ducts for securing the proper volume

and face distribution of air for each grilled and ceiling outlet. Upon completion, permanently mark all equipment settings.

c. Where required, provide pulleys for fans at no additional cost to the Owner,

and set to drive the fans at the speed needed to give the indicated volume.

d. Eliminate noise and vibration and assure proper function of all controls, maintenance of temperature, and operation in accordance with the approved design.



DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK

1. GENERAL

A. It must be understood that the heating, ventilating and air conditioning drawings and details are diagrammatic and are intended to show the intent of the specifications. The contractor shall make full allowance in his proposal to cover such contingencies as actual length and routing, proper equipment locations and connections, etc. He shall take all necessary measurements and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General Contractor for exact location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Coordinate with equipment suppliers for connections made to equipment furnished by others.

B. Make Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between drawings and/or existing

conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate discrepancies through minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.

2. MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal: Furnish, install, fit and secure in place all supply, return, exhaust and vent air

ducts, risers, branches, etc., as shown and detailed on plans, built of galvanized iron as hereinafter specified.

1. Sheet metal work shall be constructed according to practices recommended in the

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1st edition 1985" as published by SMACNA, and hereinafter specified. All duct dimensions noted on the drawings are finished inside dimensions. Sheet metal used shall not be lighter than the following:

Rectangular Galvanized Sheet Aluminum Ducts Metal Gage Alloy Up thru 12" 26 .020 13" - 30" 24 .025 31" - 54" 22 .032 55" - 84" 20 .040

Round Galvanized Sheet Ducts Metal Gage Up thru 13" 26 14" - 22" 24

2. Install ducts, risers, etc., as indicated on the drawings, making necessary changes in cross

section, offsets, etc., whether or not same is specifically indicated. If ducts cannot be run as shown on the drawings, install ducts between required point, subject to the approval of the Engineer/Architect without additional cost to the Owner.

3. At all outlets and inlets in rooms, flange ducts for attachment of grilles. Install grilles

according to manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Sheet metal work throughout shall be assembled and erected in such a manner that no vibration will occur and no noise be transmitted by the moving air.

5. All duct turns shall have either an inside radius equal to the duct width or be a miter turn

with turning vanes.

6. All supply take-offs shall be bellmouth or conical type. Square/rectangular take-off

fittings shall have 45 degree leading edge for 4" maximum depth. No air turns allowed.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin DUCTWORK 233113-1

7. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant gaskets and

tapes, except as noted.

B. Ductwork Pressure - Velocity Classification: Low Pressure, +2" W.G., 2500 FPM maximum, Class "B" seal. All grease ducts shall have welded liquid tight seal.

C. All duct turns shall have either an inside radius equal to the duct width or a miter turn with

turning vanes. Vanes shall be double wall air foil type.

D. Round take-off fittings shall be bellmouth or conical. Rectangular or square take-off fittings shall have a 45 degree lead edge with 4" minimum depth.

E. Volume Dampers: Furnish and install in branches of supply air and exhaust ducts.

Substantial volume dampers to be fitted with quadrant locking devices for adjusting the air delivery. Damper blades shall not exceed 6" width.

F. Access Panels: Install access panels with latches and gaskets in ducts at automatic dampers,

coils, fire dampers, and other duct mounted equipment. Panels in insulated ducts must be internally insulated.

G. Backdraft Dampers: Provide backdraft dampers at discharge grille of louvers unless motor

operated dampers are specified with these units. Entire perimeter of blade shall be lined with neoprene or vinyl seals to prevent clatter. Damper blades shall be tight closing.

H. Flexible Duct:

1. Provide factory fabricated insulated low pressure flexible duct with zinc-coated spring

steel helix, 1" thick fiberglass insulation sheathed in a seamless vapor barrier (RFK) jacket. Maximum length 8'.

2. Composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, meeting Class 1

requirements of flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less as set forth in NFPA Bulletin 90-A, and bearing the UL label as an air duct.

3. Flexible ductwork shall meet ductwork pressure classification.

I. Insulation:

1. Materials:

Materials shall conform to NFPA bulletin 90-A as determined by U.L. method NFPA 225 - ASTM E84, complying with applicable codes with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.

2. External Ductwork Insulation:

a. Concealed ductwork (horizontal): Wrap ductwork with flexible type fiberglass

insulation, operating temperature range 40 to 250 degrees F., K=0.25, 1-1/2 PCF density, vapor permeability less than 0.02 perms, installed R of 4.5. Johns Manville Microlite EQ Type 100 duct wrap insulation.

b. Concealed ductwork (vertical): Rigid fiberglass duct liner, operating temperature to 250 degrees F., installed R of 6.3. Johns Manville Permacote Linacoustic R-300.

c. Application Schedule: Thickness Exhaust air ducts 1-1/2" Fresh air ducts 1-1/2"

OEMA-2014-107 233113-2 DUCTWORK Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin

Supply air ducts 1-1/2"

J. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ductwork

1. Welded Steel

a. Duct to be constructed with 16 gauge welded black iron.

b. All external joints, seams and duct connections to the hood shall be welded liquid tight conforming to NFPA 90.

c. Insulation: 3M "Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+".

K. Air Outlets and Inlets:

1. Furnish grilles, registers, diffusers and louvers in the sizes, type and capacity as shown on the drawings by the selected manufacturer or approved equal.

2. Grilles, registers, diffusers shall be suitable and compatible with ceiling construction in

which they are installed. Check architectural schedules for ceiling construction. Coordinate locations with ceiling system and lighting fixtures.

3. EXECUTION

A. Ducts shall be constructed, supported and installed in accordance with the latest standards of

SMACNA. Install all turning vanes, access doors, extractors, and accessories as indicated or specified herein.

B. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and services and perform all tests necessary to

demonstrate the integrity of the completed installation to the approval of the Owner and Engineer/Architect. The air and hydronic systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the latest edition of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Procedural Standards, NEBB or equivalent.


OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin DUCTWORK 233113-3

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 260000 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

1. GENERAL

A. All work listed herein is subject to Division 1 General Requirements, and the contractor and

his subcontractors shall be responsible for and governed by all requirements thereunder.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, transportation, permits, certificates of inspection as required for the complete electrical installation as specified hereinafter and as shown on the drawings.

C. Prior to submitting his bid, the contractor shall call the attention of the Engineer/Architect to

any materials or apparatus he believes inadequate and to any necessary items or work omitted.

D. If an item is either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications it shall

be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in this contract.

2. CODES, PERMITS AND FEES

A. All work and materials are to conform in every detail to the rules and requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriter's, National Electrical Code, OSHA, state and local codes and the local utilities. The contractor shall obtain all permits needed in connection with the work and pay all fees incident thereto including necessary costs to bring distribution to site.

3. DRAWINGS

A. It must be understood that the electrical drawings and details are diagrammatic and are

intended to show the intent of the specifications. The contractor shall make full allowance in his proposal to cover such contingencies as actual length and routing of conduit run, proper equipment locations and connections, etc. He shall take all necessary measurements and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General Contractor for exact location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Coordinate with equipment suppliers for connections made to equipment furnished by others.

B. Make Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between drawings and/or

existing conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate discrepancies through minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.

C. Upon completion of the job, the Electrical Contractor shall turn over to the Owner a

complete set of tracings or a drawing showing size, description and location of electrical materials as actually installed.

4. INTENT

A. This contractor shall furnish and install all the necessary materials, apparatus and devices,

to complete the electrical equipment herein as specified, except such parts as are specifically excepted.

B. It is the intent of these specifications and the drawings accompanying same to cause

this equipment to be furnished complete in every respect. C. If an item is either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications, it shall

be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in this contract.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 260000-1

D. Material and labor shall be first class and workmanlike and to the satisfaction of the

Engineer/Architect, and shall be subject to his inspection, test and approval at all times from the commencement until the acceptance of the completed work.

E. Where certain items are specified by manufacturer or trade names, the contractor's bid shall

be based on the use of the named item. Where one make is described and others listed, comparable models of the other named equipment may be used.

5. COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS

A. The contractor shall lay out his work and shall be responsible for its correctness. He is to

take such measurements from existing work as may be necessary to insure the fitting of his work and all other work depending thereon. Check equipment provided by others which required electrical connections and provide outlets suitably located for them. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for all circuitry required for all equipment. Items not specifically mentioned in Equipment Connections, shall be the responsibility of the designated subcontractor. Cooperation between the various contractors to accomplish this must exist at all times.

6. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. It is the intent that the Electrical Contractor shall base his proposal upon furnishing and

installing materials as specified. In case the successful bidder wishes to substitute on manufacturer and/or catalog number, such substitutions shall be reviewed and discussed with the Engineer/Architect. NO substitutions will be considered unless product substituted shall benefit the Owner in appearance, operation, efficiency and cost. Further substitutions shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions and Special Conditions.

7. CODES AND STANDARDS

All work and materials shall be in accordance with the following: National Electrical Code, state and local governing codes, state and local fire codes, regulations of the electric utility serving the project, and OSHA regulations, current edition.

The following standards apply as minimum requirements: U.L. standards, NFPA requirements and NEMA standards..

8. INSPECTIONS

Electrical Contractor shall arrange for all required periodic regulatory inspections.

9. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. Lighting

1. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watts/sq. ft.

2. Provide and maintain .5 watt/sq. ft. lighting to exterior staging and storage areas

after dark for security purposes.

3. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

4. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 5. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

OEMA-2014-107 260000-2 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin

B. Power

1. Provide temporary electrical service with distribution equipment within 10 feet of

the back of the building within two weeks of start of project.

2. Power service characteristics: 240 volt, 200 ampere, single phase.

3. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required.

4. Provide feeder switch at source distribution equipment.

5. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

10. SERVICE, UTILITIES

A. Coordinate the extensions of electrical, telephone and TV cable services to have

services available for orderly progress of work. Pay all permanent connection charges.

Contractor shall include all charges for service installations in his bid.

B. Verify service entrance locations with power, cable and telephone companies. Verify

number and size of conduit required for conductors prior to bid.

11. SHOP DRAWINGS

Provide four (4) copies of all submittals.

Submittals must include all details, noted in the Contract Documents plus ampacity, rated voltage, cycles, phase, number of poles, maximum fault current and wiring diagrams.

All submittal sheets must be marked to indicate the exact equipment and connections required. General submittal sheets, drawings and wiring diagrams not properly marked will be rejected.

For all equipment requiring installation or connection by another contractor, furnish one (1) additional set of shop drawings for each contractor making connections to the equipment involved.

The following submittals will be required:

1. Service equipment:

a. Meter centers b. C/T cabinet if required c. Panel boards d. Associated equipment as required

2. Lighting fixtures and standards 3. Emergency lighting 4. Specialty items

12. CONCLUSION

A. The contractor shall furnish the Owner with two complete sets of operating and

maintenance instructions for all items furnished under this contract. Provide in bound sets with complete index tabs. Information must include parts list, equipment warranties and wiring diagrams.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 260000-3

B. The contractor shall provide the Owner with a set of drawings showing the route and depth of the underground services. Conduit routing and pull boxes shall be indicated.

13. GUARANTEE

A. This contractor acknowledges his acquaintances with these specifications and the

respective requirements. He guarantees that the electrical system has been installed strictly in accordance with the electrical plans and specifications, using only the best of materials available, installed in a substantial manner by experienced labor.

B. The contractor, by acceptance of this contract guarantees all labor and materials provided

hereunder and shall at his expense repair, remodel, rebuild, replace and/or require and further make good and acceptable all labor and materials, except lamps found defective within one year from date of final acceptance.


OEMA-2014-107 260000-4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin


SECTION 260010 - GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS AND SERVICE

1. GENERAL

A. The preferred wholesaler for this project is Crescent Electric Supply Company - contact

Jenn Herodes at (608) 241-2882 (e-mail [email protected]). Culver’s Franchising System has worked out package pricing for electrical equipment.

B. Section 260000 and all references therein form a part of this section.

C. Coordinate with local utility to provide service entrance.

D. By Utility:

1. Primary electric service - 800 amp 3 phase. Verify with utility.

2. Power transformer. Verify with utility.

3. Secondary service conductors, contractor to verify, include in bid if required.

4. Conductor termination fittings and secondary service conductor terminations in customers service equipment, where applicable, contractor to verify, include in bid if required.

E. By Electrical Contractor:

1. Provide conduit(s) and wiring from building electric service equipment underground

to the outside of the building where indicated on the drawings as per utility requirements.

2. Trenching from transformer pad to building.

3. Secondary service ground at building.

4. Provide empty conduit(s) for secondary service conductors under walks, drives,

parking lots, etc. as required by the utility for lighting, signage.

F. Verify service entrance locations with utility. Verify number and size of conduits required for secondary service conductors.

2. MATERIALS

A. Service Equipment

1. Meter sockets, current transformer cabinets and service terminal boxes shall

meet requirements of the power company.

2. Circuit breaker disconnects shall be Square D.

B. Balancing Loads

When connecting single phase circuits to a three phase system, distribute the loads among phases to achieve a balanced load on all three phases of the system.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE 260010-1

C. Power and Lighting Panels

1. All panel boards shall be Square D, shall have doors, and shall be securely mounted at the locations indicated on the drawings. All other panels shall have stenciled identifying code letters/numbers on the outside of the panel doors and in accordance with the drawings.

2. Circuit breakers shall be common-trip for multi-pole bolt-on.

3. Provide circuit-directory card, typed or neatly black-ink lettered, in each panel

board and under clear plastic shield. Identify all circuits.

D. Wiring Devices

1. All conductors shall be copper, except in sizes #3 AWG and larger, equal ampacity aluminum conductors may be used.

2. Minimum wire size shall be #12 AWG, unless otherwise noted.

3. Wire #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid with THWN insulation.

4. Wire #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded with THWN insulation.

5. All wiring above the floor will be installed in thin-walled metal conduit.

6. Fixture drops to be metal clad flexible conduit with green ground conductor -

maximum length 6'-0".

7. All wiring installed underground or in the floor slab shall be installed in rigid heavy wall galvanized steel conduit or rigid heavy wall PVC.

8. All wiring installed exposed to the elements shall be in rigid heavy wall galvanized

steel conduit.

9. Install all emergency lights, exit lights and fire alarm wiring in conduit or raceways. #10 wire minimum wire size for exit and emergency light

circuits.

10. Single conductors installed in conduit may be used throughout.

11. Low voltage wiring to be supported at 5'-0" o.c. maximum.

3. EXECUTION

A. Install service and service equipment as shown on the drawings and riser diagrams.

B. Main service equipment located on the inner face of walls shall be mounted on 3/4" weatherproof plywood painted with one coat primer and one coat grey enamel before installation of equipment.

C. Provide system ground for new service as required by Code.

1. Ground all equipment, including switches, transformers, conduit systems, motors and

all other apparatus by conduit to cold water main and to independent electrode using Burndy or T & B ground clamps. Use additional ground rods if water service is not metallic or if isolation couplings have been used.

OEMA-2014-107 260010-2 GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

2. Locate ground rods in planters or similar areas which will receive water regularly. Drive to a depth of at least 8 feet.

3. Perform ground tests to assure not more than 5 ohms resistance. Add rods as required.

4. Provide ground conductor to all motor and equipment connections. Conduit grounding alone is not

acceptable.

D. Transformers, meters, and primary electric service to property limits by local utility company. Contractor shall coordinate work with power company. Pay any charges to power company required for installation of service including costs necessary to bring service to property.

E. Connections at all switches and receptacles shall be by screw terminal connections - not thru "plug-in" type connections provided on the rear of the devices.


OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE 260010-3


SECTION 265000 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

1. GENERAL

A. Sections 260000 and 260010 and all references therein form a part of this section.

B. There shall be furnished:

1. A complete conduit and wire system for power and lighting including underground electric service, metering facilities, panelboards, feeder system for power and lighting as indicated on the drawings and specified in Division 26.

2. Branch circuit wiring, in conduit, for lighting, receptacles, junction boxes and motors.

3. Wiring and connections for equipment.

4. A complete installation of fixtures and lamps, including interior lighting, exit

lighting, exterior lighting and building lighting.

5. Emergency lighting as shown on the drawings.

6. Telephone service conduit and terminal back boards.

7. Intercom and voice/data conduit system.

8. Television wiring and conduit system and terminal back board.

9. In-duct smoke detector with remote visible and audible signal.

10. Wiring system in conduit for equipment and controls, motors and controls provided by plumbing and HVAC contractors which require motor starters and line voltage controls.

11. All other items necessary to complete all systems.

C. Equipment Connections

Provide all branch wiring, disconnections, trenching, conduit, etc. as required for all equipment associated with the building, including but not limited to:

1. All food preparation, handling, serving and sanitizing equipment. Provide cord

for shake machine. 2. Custard machine and associated compressors. 3. All intercom and voice/data equipment. 4. All refrigeration equipment. 5. All HVAC equipment including exhaust fans, kitchen fan controls, motorized intake

dampers, economizer controls, in-duct smoke detector and associated equipment. 6. All motors and starters. 7. All plumbing equipment including water heater controls, circulating pump, water

softener, automatic water control valves. 8. Exterior lighting including building, remote directional signs, pole lighting, accent

lighting, utility building lighting, main sign, marquee signs, patio bollards. 9. Time clock controls.

10. Emergency lighting. 11. Laundry units. 12. Telephone system. 13. Refrigerant alarm.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION 265000-1

14. Fire suppression system. 15. Television distribution system. 16. Cash registers and associated equipment. 17. Menu board. 18. Speaker post. 19. Photo cell. 20. Ice machine. 21. Smoke detector and remote alarm. 22. Line voltage control wiring. 23. Sprinkler alarm. 24. Panic alarm.

D. Conduit only: Provide trenching, conduit, etc. as required for all equipment associated

with the building including but not limited to:

1. Future reader board on main sign. 2. Order verification board. 3. Sensor loop. 4. 200' for cable TV - coordinate location with General Contractor. 5. Future electric ceiling heaters and associated controls.

2. MATERIALS

A. Telephone

1. Provide complete wiring system in conduit as required by telephone company

with outlets as shown on the drawings. All wiring shall be in conduit.

2. Telephone jacks shall be flush, single gang boxes with ivory plastic cover plates to match electrical cover plates.

a. Wall mount telephone jack for hanging telephone: Pass & Seymour #WMTE14I.

b. Single gang, two modular jack with wall plate: Pass & Seymour #TPTE 2I.

3. Provide an empty conduit to mechanical room as required by the telephone company, for underground service entrance cables. Coordinate requirements with telephone company.

4. Telephone cable to be CAT-5.

B. Television (Cable TV)

1. Provide a complete television wiring distribution system including outlet boxes and cover plates for all outlet boxes.

2. Single gang "F" type with one coaxial connector - Pass & Seymour #TPCATVI.

C. Receptacles

1. Single

a. Dryer: Pass & Seymour #3860, 30 amp., 125/250 volt, flush receptacle with #TP724 wall plate or equal.

b. Kitchen Equipment: Pass & Seymour #2085I dead front GFI with

#26361I, 20 amp. 125 volt heavy-duty spec. grade single receptacle. 2. Duplex

a. Interior: Pass & Seymour #5362I, 20 amp., 125 volt hard use duplex outlet.

OEMA-2014-107 265000-2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin

b. Interior: Pass & Seymour #2095I , 20 amp. 125 volt ground fault circuit interrupter receptacle.

c. Exterior Roof: Pass & Seymour #2095I, 20 amp., 125 volt, ground fault

circuit interrupter receptacle with intermatic WP1000 recessed in-use cover.

d. Exterior Wall: Pass & Seymour #2095I, 20 amp., 125 volt ground fault

circuit interrupter receptacle with intermatic WP1010 die-cast in-use cover.

3. Equipment: Verify receptacle requirements with kitchen equipment supplier.

D. Switches

1. Single pole: Pass & Seymour #CSB20AC1I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.

2. Single pole-keyed: Pass & Seymour #PS20AC1IL, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.

3. Three way: Pass & Seymour #CSB20AC3I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.

4. Four way: Pass & Seymour #CSB20AC4I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.

E. Device Cover Plates

1. Interior Kitchen: Aluminum or stainless steel.

2. Interior Dining: Ivory.

F. Lighting Fixtures

1. The type of fixture to be provided for each outlet is indicated by a letter symbol on the working drawings - these various types are called for in the Lighting Fixtures Schedule.

2. All fluorescent lighting to be equipped with electronic ballasts and energy saving lamps.

3. All incidental materials, fittings, hangers to make the lighting fixture

installation complete, shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.

G. Lighting Controls

1. Provide photo cell control on all exterior non-switched fixtures.

2. Provide time clock controls for exterior lighting.

3. EXECUTION

A. All trenching where required shall be a minimum of 24" below final site grades.

B. Conduit Installation

1. Conduit shall be run concealed in walls of the building. Bend conduit to conform to rock in underground excavated areas, conceal where possible. Buried PVC conduit shall be imbedded in sand as required to protect against damage due to rocks.

2. Conduits shall be securely fastened to structure using straps or hangers at intervals not greater than 8' and at closer intervals in areas exposed to public contact. Generally, conduit straps shall be one-hole malleable. Perforated iron hangers or


wire will not be approved.

3. Conduit to exterior lights shall be concealed and holes through exterior walls carefully caulked and sealed.

4. Conduit fittings shall be tightly applied to maintain rigidity and good electrical bonding.

C. Boxes

1. All electrical boxes shall be standard galvanized or plastic where use permits of a size adequate for the number of wires and splices. Boxes shall be securely mounted, set true and flush with finished surfaces. Race, Appleton and Steel City considered equal.

D. Cutting, Patching and Sleeves

1. Cutting and channeling shall be held to a minimum. Provisions for openings, holes

and clearance through walls, floors, ceilings and partitions shall be made in advance of construction of such parts of the building. Sleeves may be either plastic or sheet metal.

2. After conduits are installed in sleeves, openings shall be neatly closed and sealed.

3. Slabs and walls damaged by installation of the electrical work shall be repaired to

the satisfaction of the Engineer/ Architect by the Electrical Contractor.

E. Painting

1. Wood panels and metal frame works required by this electrical work shall be painted by this contractor. Paint before installation of equipment.

2.

Fixture hangers and supports, panel trims and flush junction box covers in place prior to normal routine painting will be painted by others, if not in place at this time, this contractor shall be responsible for painting.

3.

This contractor shall be responsible for refinishing factory finishes damaged by rust and/or corrosion or damaged by scratching during storage or installation of same.

F. Wire and Cable Installation

1.

No wire or cable shall be installed in any conduit until building is enclosed, watertight and dry. Conduits having water and/or debris in them shall be swabbed out before conductors are installed.

2.

Properly install conductors in conduit in such fashion that insulation is not damaged or conductors are overstressed.

3.

Splice conductors #10 and smaller with Code approved connectors such as Scotchlok. Use cast-type connectors with set screw for #8 and larger connections. Tape with Scotch #88 plastic type or equal.

4. Identify phases of all panel feeders with colored tape or colored conductors at panel lugs.

G. Fixtures and Lamps

1. Light fixtures as shown on the drawings and shall be installed complete with lamps, starters and all other equipment necessary for operation.

OEMA-2014-107 265000-4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION Culver’s Restaurant - Janesville, Wisconsin

2. All fixture wiring shall be concealed unless fixture design prevents concealment; all fixtures must be firmly supported from ceiling suspension of structural system, not from ceiling material.

3. All fixtures and lamps shall be in perfect condition when job is turned over to

the Owner, and shall function properly to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Engineer/Architect before approval is given.

4. Lamps in fluorescent fixtures shall be energy saving cool white, G.E., Westinghouse

or Sylvania are considered equal. All fluorescent lamps shall be guaranteed by the Electrical Contractor for one year.

5. All other lamps shall be 120 volt. Incandescent lamps shall be G.E. inside-

frosted unless otherwise specified on the drawings.

H. Light Standards

Provide trenching, conduit and wiring and install exterior lights and light standards as shown on the drawings in accordance with Code requirements. Provide all required concrete foundation work and anchor bolts in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

I. Site Signage

Provide trenching, conduit and wiring for site signage. Signs, bases and installation by others.

J. Tests and Demonstrations

1. Before placing electrical system in operation, test all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds.

2. Demonstrate proper performance of all connected electrical equipment and systems.



DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

SECTION 312000 - EARTHWORK

1. GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY


1. Site clearing. 2. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil. 3. Excavation for footings and foundations. 4. Excavation of trenches for underground utilities within the building. 5. Dewatering of excavations. 6. Rough grading for new slabs on grade. 7. Removal of unsatisfactory material below rough grade and subgrade levels as required. 8. Provision of granular materials from offsite for structural fill as required. 9. Classifying and stockpiling usable excavated material, on site, for re-use.

10. Preparation of subgrades to receive fills. 11. Filling, backfilling and compaction of fills. 12. Finish grading of disturbed site areas. 13. Removal of excess excavated materials.


1. Soil borings ............................................................................................ Section 023213. 2. Foundation perimeter insulation ............................................................. Section 072100.


A. Federal Regulations: Earthwork shall conform to:

1. OSHA 29CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, “Excavations” and its appendices. Any requirements specified below which may appear to conflict with OSHA requirements are to be interpreted as supplements and are not intended to supersede OSHA.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. Contractor shall employ and pay for a licensed Engineer or Surveyor, registered in the state, to establish all lines and levels required for execution of the Work.

2. The Engineer/Surveyor shall send a certified statement to Owner after work is completed stating that the constructed lines and levels meet all requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.

C. Soil Testing and Inspection Service:

1. The Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform testing for in-place foundation soils and other soil materials proposed for use in the Work.

2. Costs for the first testing of an area shall be paid for by the Owner. All testing required for checking and correcting faulty work or work to be re-done shall be paid for by the Contractor at his own expense.

3. Services shall include:

a. Observation of proofrolling.

OEMA-2014-107 Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin EARTHWORK 312000-1

b. Sieve analysis of material to be used for compacted fill beneath footings and for fill beneath concrete slabs in exterior areas.

c. Tests for maximum dry density of compacted fill materials.

d. In-place field dry density tests for every 2,500 square feet of area of each layer of compacted subgrade fill under building slabs, other than drainage fill, as directed by Owner’s Representative.

e. In-place field dry density tests, per ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and D3017, for each layer of compacted fill under all footings, as directed by Owner’s Representative.

f. If compaction is found to be unsatisfactory, extra in-place field dry density tests to determine the extent of recompaction work required.

1.03. SUBMITTALS


B. Submit to the Soil Testing Service 50 pound representative samples of each proposed fill material at least 2 days prior to the start of any filling operation.

C. The Soil Testing Service shall submit 2 copies of all test reports to Owner’s Representative.

D. The Surveyor/Engineer shall submit to the Owner's Representative 2 copies of his certification that all work has been constructed as indicated and specified.


A. Existing Conditions: The excavation contractor shall visit the site prior to submitting his bid in order to determine the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate and the extent of the site preparation work required.

B. Existing Utilities:

1. Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work before starting earthwork operations. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations.

2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the Owner’s Representative immediately as to how to proceed.

3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied or used by the Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the Owner's Representative and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been arranged.

4. Demolish and completely remove from the site underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with local utility companies for shut-off and capping or sealing of services if lines are active.

C. Explosives: The use of explosives will not be permitted.

1.05. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. Barricade open excavations made as a part of earthwork operations and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.

B. Protect benchmarks and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs against damage from vehicular or foot traffic.

C. Protect from frost the bottoms of excavations and soils around and beneath foundations.

OEMA-2014-107 312000-2 EARTHWORK Culver’s Restaurant – Janesville, Wisconsin

1.06. BRACING, SHEETING AND SHORING

A. Provide bracing, sheeting and shoring for the sides of excavations as necessary to prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures, utilities, roads and streets, etc. The cost of bracing, sheeting and shoring required shall be deemed to have been included as part of the Contract Sum.

B. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the strength and adequacy of all such bracing, sheeting and shoring, and is liable for any damage or injury caused by or resulting from improperly supported soils and structures. He shall, if required, submit fully detailed Shop Drawings for review prior to placement; however, such review shall not diminish the Contractor’s responsibilities in any way.

C. The Contractor shall issue any notices to owner of adjoining property that may be required by any pertinent laws or ordinances. Furnish copies of such notices to Owner's Representative.

D. If the safety of any adjacent structures, utilities, etc., shall appear to be endangered, take all proper means to support such embankments, structures, utilities, etc., and notify the Owner. Do not resume operation without the Owner’s permission.

E. Provide and place bracing and shoring ordered by the Owner when necessary to safeguard adjacent buildings, etc. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly when so ordered, the required bracing and shoring may be placed by order of the Owner at the Contractor’s expense. Any such action shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the bracing and shoring or liability for damage.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01. SOIL MATERIALS

A. Fill Materials: Shall be obtained from excavations on the site, provided the material meets the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report, the Soils Engineer and is approved by the testing lab. Fill material from offsite shall be obtained from borrow pits approved by the testing lab and meeting the requirements of the Soils Engineer.

B. Fill Supporting Footings (structural fill): Well graded granular material, sand or gravel, tested by the testing laboratory. Not more than 10% shall pass #200 sieve; except that fill placed during wet weather or in wet areas shall have no more than 5% passing #200 sieve.

C. Fill under Interior Floor Slabs, UP TO Drainage Course: Granular fill, the same as used for footings.

D. Drainage Fill Directly Under Interior Floor Slabs: Well-graded sand or gravel with no more than 5% by weight passing the No. 200 U.S. standard sieve and acceptable to the Soils Engineer.

E. Fill Under Concrete Platforms: Granular fill, the same as used for footings.

F. Other (Ordinary) Backfill and Fill: Reasonably uniform soil materials free of organic or frozen material, debris, trash, and of stones 4" or greater in diameter. Soils from excavations on site may be used provided they can be compacted to the densities specified.

3. EXECUTION

3.01. SITE CLEARING

A. General:

1. Except as otherwise indicated, remove trees, shrubs, grass, weeds and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions that directly interfere with installation of new construction. Remove tree stumps and remove roots projecting above surface of finish grade.

2. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and branches of trees indicated to be left standing, where such roots and branches obstruct facilities to be constructed. Do not remove branches and roots for


the convenience of construction operations except as approved by Owner for each tree. After cutting branches and roots, immediately apply an approved wound dressing.

B. Topsoil Removal: Strip topsoil from areas to be excavated for construction. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.

1. Remove topsoil down to subsoils.

2. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance from such trees to prevent damage to the main root system.

3. Topsoil which has been removed without intermingling with other soils and is reasonably free of clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material, shall be stockpiled for completion of the work. Topsoil not meeting these criteria may only be used for landscape work and shall be stockpiled separately or removed from the site.

4. Construct stockpiles so as to drain precipitation freely. Cover storage piles as required to prevent wind-blown dust and erosion.

3.02. WATER CONTROL

A. Grade around excavated areas so as to prevent water from running into trenches, areas for slabs-on-grade and excavations; and grade so as to prevent water from running onto adjacent properties or public thoroughfares.

B. Keep excavations dry with pumps, piping and temporary drains until backfilling is completed.

C. When the earthwork may produce disturbances requiring compliance with a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Storm Water Permit, the Excavation Contractor shall develop a storm water pollution control plan with the cooperation of the Owner (the permittee), using good engineering practices.

1. The plan, when so required, shall identify potential sources of pollution that may be reasonably expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge.

2. The plan shall describe practices to reduce pollutants.

3. The plan shall provide means to ensure that the anti-pollution practices will be implemented and the terms of the permit met.

4. The General Contractor and subcontractors involved in earthwork shall certify that they understand and will comply with all requirements of the permit.

5. A copy of the permit and the certifications shall be kept on-site for inspection upon request.

D. Do not discharge drainage water lines into municipal sewers without municipal approval.

E. Ensure that water discharge does not contain silt.

3.03. EXCAVATION

A. General: Excavate for all work to elevations and dimensions indicated, plus sufficient space to permit erection and installation of forms for footings and foundation walls.

1. Notify testing lab and Owner of all unexpected sub-surface conditions. Discontinue work in area until Owner provides notification to resume work.

B. All subgrades for footing and building slabs shall be in compliance with Soils Investigation Report and be approved by the soils testing service. Give soils testing service adequate notice as to when excavations are scheduled to reach subgrade elevations shown on Drawings.

1. After topsoil is stripped, underlying soils shall be checked for soft/yielding areas by proofrolling with a loaded tri-axle dump truck.


2. Soft/yielding areas shall be undercut, to depths and widths as directed, and replaced with granular fill backfill and compacted to at least 95% compaction per modified Proctor methods (ASTM D 1557) per Soil Investigations Report.

C. Authorized Additional Excavation: If an unacceptable subgrade material is encountered at the subgrade elevation shown on the Drawings, the Owner may direct the Contractor to excavate to a greater depth by way of Change Order.

D. Unauthorized Excavations: If an acceptable subgrade is encountered at the subgrade elevation shown on the Drawings and excavation goes to a greater depth, no additional payment shall be made by the Owner for such excavation nor for backfilling to repair the over excavation.

E. Rock Excavation:

1. Definition: Excavation of boulders or pieces of rock, concrete, or masonry measuring more than 1/2 cubic yard; or hard shale or solid ledge rock and masonry requiring continuous use of pneumatic tools or drilling to be removed.

2. Contractor must demonstrate inability to remove by hand pick or by power excavator used for other excavation. Prior to removal, obtain written approval from Owner's Representative that material to be removed qualifies for extra payment.

F. Protect footing and building slab excavations from freezing until excavations are completely backfilled.

3.04. EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHING

A. General: Excavate for underground utility lines within building. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Trench Dimensions:

1. Cut trenches wide enough to enable proper installation of services, and to allow for inspection.

2. When sheeting and bracing are used, increase trench width accordingly.

3. Do not exceed a trench bottom width of 30 inches at or below top of pipe and inside sheeting and bracing.

A. Trench Bottoms (with bedding course): Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

4. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

5. Ensure that trenching does not interfere with normal 45° bearing slope of foundation for any structures.

C. Unsuitable Bearing Soil:

1. Where unsuitable soil conditions are encountered, requiring removal below specified depth, replace material with fill approved by Soils Engineer.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

E. Comply with recommendations of Soil Investigation Report for installation and protection of utility lines below foundation structures.


3.05. UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Bedding: Conform to City Standard Specifications, requirements of Soils Investigation Report and the Soils Engineer’s recommendations.

1. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

B. Backfilling:

1. Inspection: Do not start backfilling until utility lines are inspected. Ensure that trenches are free of building debris, snow, ice, and water and that ground surfaces are not frozen.

2. Backfilling: Backfill systematically and early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement.

3. Soil Backfill: Place and compact backfill of on-site soils, as approved by Soils Engineer, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit, installed in lifts not to exceed 8 inches.

a. Carefully compact backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit.

3.06. FILLING AND COMPACTION

A. General:

1. Remove all debris from excavations before backfilling.

2. No fill to be compacted shall be placed in free water, or on frozen ground.

3. Unless directed otherwise by Soils Engineer, manipulate and wet the fill materials as required to obtain uniform moisture content throughout. Fills shall be placed at +2% of the material’s optimum moisture content.

4. Unless directed otherwise by Soils Engineer, prior to placement of fills under footings, slabs and pavings, the upper 12" of subgrade shall be brought to within 2% of optimum moisture and compacted to not less than 90% per Modified Proctor Method.

5. All subgrades shall be approved by the soils testing service just prior to placement of fills. Should subgrade become frozen, desiccated, saturated or disturbed, remove the affected material, or scarify, moisture condition and recompact the affected materials. Notify soils testing service well ahead of when excavations are scheduled to reach the subgrade elevations required.

6. Proofroll after placement of fill to verify compliance.

B. Placing Fill to be Compacted:

1. Placement: Place fill material in layers not exceeding 8" in thickness, starting in the deepest area and progressing approximately parallel to the finished grade.

2. Testing Between Layers: Compaction of each layer shall be tested as specified. Obtain approval from Owner's Representative before next layer of fill is started.

3. Drainage Course under Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade: Install a layer of the specified granular fill 6" thick, such that, after compaction, the top of the fill will be at the bottom elevation of the slab as indicated by the Drawings, plus 0", minus 1/2".

4. Fill Under Exterior Platform Slabs: Extend granular fill down to bottom of platform foundation.


C. Compaction Procedures:

1. Compact the soils immediately after placement, while they retain their optimum moisture content; if directed by Soils Engineer, manipulate and wet the soil as required to obtain the required moisture content uniformly throughout.

2. Suspend compaction operations when proper results cannot be obtained because of rain or soggy conditions, or when other conditions are unsatisfactory.

3. Compact with vibratory compaction and/or rolling equipment to the specified densities. Compaction by travel of grading equipment will not be considered adequate. Use small vibratory or hand tamping compactors whenever fill is placed adjacent to walls or around footings and columns.

4. Each layer of fill shall be compacted all across its surface to the required density before additional fill may be placed.

5. If compaction is found to be unsatisfactory, recompact until required density is achieved.

D. Compaction Densities:

1. Granular Fill under Footings, Building Slabs and Exterior Platforms: 95% of maximum density, per Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D 1557).

2. Fills To 10 Feet outside of Building Perimeter: 95% of maximum density, per Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D 1557).

E. Replacement of Over-Excavation:

1. Where over-excavation has been authorized, provide approved granular fill to replace the materials excavated from below the designated design subgrade and compact the fill to the required densities. Payment for such additional work will be in accordance with the established unit prices.

2. When authorized over-excavation causes the width of the excavation to be increased, fill the excavation to the extended width with the appropriate fill materials and compact the fill to the required densities. Payment for the additional fill work required will be in accordance with the established unit prices.

3. Where over excavation has not been authorized, fill with granular fill compacted to the required density at the required elevation without additional payment.

3.07. ROUGH GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade new filled areas, including adjacent transition areas, and as otherwise indicated within the limits of construction. Include any areas disturbed by construction operations.

1. Smooth the finished surfaces within specified tolerances, with uniform levels of slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades.

2. The degree of finish required will be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader or scraper operations.

B. Walks: Shape the surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with the finish surface not more than 0.00' above nor 0.10' below the required subgrade elevation, after compaction, and graded to prevent ponding of water after rains.

C. Interior of Building: Rough grade the areas under slabs-on-grade to not less than 6" nor more than 6-1/2", plus the slab thickness, below finish floor line. Grade the surface so as to be free from irregular surface changes.


3.08. MAINTENANCE

A. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction.

B. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free of trash and debris.

1. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified tolerances.

2. Any settlement of areas shall be filled level and smoothed out, and shall be repaired so as to maintain the required grade level for a period of one year.

3.09. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove excavated material unsuitable for fill or backfill from Owner’s property before backfill operations begin. After backfilling is completed, remove from Owner's property all excess fill material.

B. Areas under stockpiles not indicated as receiving new construction shall be restored to original condition.

C. All off-site hauling shall be in tight beds such as to prevent spilling onto streets or highways. Use drip pans where necessary to prevent spilling. Off-site haul routes shall be approved by the appropriate county and city authorities for disposal of wastes from this contract.

D. All excess material removed from site shall become the property of the Contractor. Legally dispose of all materials removed from the site.

END 312000.
